sparc.c revision 1.1.1.1
1/* Subroutines for insn-output.c for SPARC. 2 Copyright (C) 1987, 1988, 1989, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 3 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010 4 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 5 Contributed by Michael Tiemann (tiemann@cygnus.com) 6 64-bit SPARC-V9 support by Michael Tiemann, Jim Wilson, and Doug Evans, 7 at Cygnus Support. 8 9This file is part of GCC. 10 11GCC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify 12it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by 13the Free Software Foundation; either version 3, or (at your option) 14any later version. 15 16GCC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, 17but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of 18MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the 19GNU General Public License for more details. 20 21You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License 22along with GCC; see the file COPYING3. If not see 23<http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. */ 24 25#include "config.h" 26#include "system.h" 27#include "coretypes.h" 28#include "tm.h" 29#include "tree.h" 30#include "rtl.h" 31#include "regs.h" 32#include "hard-reg-set.h" 33#include "real.h" 34#include "insn-config.h" 35#include "insn-codes.h" 36#include "conditions.h" 37#include "output.h" 38#include "insn-attr.h" 39#include "flags.h" 40#include "function.h" 41#include "expr.h" 42#include "optabs.h" 43#include "recog.h" 44#include "toplev.h" 45#include "ggc.h" 46#include "tm_p.h" 47#include "debug.h" 48#include "target.h" 49#include "target-def.h" 50#include "cfglayout.h" 51#include "gimple.h" 52#include "langhooks.h" 53#include "params.h" 54#include "df.h" 55#include "dwarf2out.h" 56 57/* Processor costs */ 58static const 59struct processor_costs cypress_costs = { 60 COSTS_N_INSNS (2), /* int load */ 61 COSTS_N_INSNS (2), /* int signed load */ 62 COSTS_N_INSNS (2), /* int zeroed load */ 63 COSTS_N_INSNS (2), /* float load */ 64 COSTS_N_INSNS (5), /* fmov, fneg, fabs */ 65 COSTS_N_INSNS (5), /* fadd, fsub */ 66 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* fcmp */ 67 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* fmov, fmovr */ 68 COSTS_N_INSNS (7), /* fmul */ 69 COSTS_N_INSNS (37), /* fdivs */ 70 COSTS_N_INSNS (37), /* fdivd */ 71 COSTS_N_INSNS (63), /* fsqrts */ 72 COSTS_N_INSNS (63), /* fsqrtd */ 73 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* imul */ 74 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* imulX */ 75 0, /* imul bit factor */ 76 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* idiv */ 77 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* idivX */ 78 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* movcc/movr */ 79 0, /* shift penalty */ 80}; 81 82static const 83struct processor_costs supersparc_costs = { 84 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* int load */ 85 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* int signed load */ 86 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* int zeroed load */ 87 COSTS_N_INSNS (0), /* float load */ 88 COSTS_N_INSNS (3), /* fmov, fneg, fabs */ 89 COSTS_N_INSNS (3), /* fadd, fsub */ 90 COSTS_N_INSNS (3), /* fcmp */ 91 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* fmov, fmovr */ 92 COSTS_N_INSNS (3), /* fmul */ 93 COSTS_N_INSNS (6), /* fdivs */ 94 COSTS_N_INSNS (9), /* fdivd */ 95 COSTS_N_INSNS (12), /* fsqrts */ 96 COSTS_N_INSNS (12), /* fsqrtd */ 97 COSTS_N_INSNS (4), /* imul */ 98 COSTS_N_INSNS (4), /* imulX */ 99 0, /* imul bit factor */ 100 COSTS_N_INSNS (4), /* idiv */ 101 COSTS_N_INSNS (4), /* idivX */ 102 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* movcc/movr */ 103 1, /* shift penalty */ 104}; 105 106static const 107struct processor_costs hypersparc_costs = { 108 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* int load */ 109 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* int signed load */ 110 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* int zeroed load */ 111 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* float load */ 112 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* fmov, fneg, fabs */ 113 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* fadd, fsub */ 114 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* fcmp */ 115 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* fmov, fmovr */ 116 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* fmul */ 117 COSTS_N_INSNS (8), /* fdivs */ 118 COSTS_N_INSNS (12), /* fdivd */ 119 COSTS_N_INSNS (17), /* fsqrts */ 120 COSTS_N_INSNS (17), /* fsqrtd */ 121 COSTS_N_INSNS (17), /* imul */ 122 COSTS_N_INSNS (17), /* imulX */ 123 0, /* imul bit factor */ 124 COSTS_N_INSNS (17), /* idiv */ 125 COSTS_N_INSNS (17), /* idivX */ 126 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* movcc/movr */ 127 0, /* shift penalty */ 128}; 129 130static const 131struct processor_costs sparclet_costs = { 132 COSTS_N_INSNS (3), /* int load */ 133 COSTS_N_INSNS (3), /* int signed load */ 134 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* int zeroed load */ 135 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* float load */ 136 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* fmov, fneg, fabs */ 137 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* fadd, fsub */ 138 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* fcmp */ 139 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* fmov, fmovr */ 140 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* fmul */ 141 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* fdivs */ 142 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* fdivd */ 143 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* fsqrts */ 144 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* fsqrtd */ 145 COSTS_N_INSNS (5), /* imul */ 146 COSTS_N_INSNS (5), /* imulX */ 147 0, /* imul bit factor */ 148 COSTS_N_INSNS (5), /* idiv */ 149 COSTS_N_INSNS (5), /* idivX */ 150 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* movcc/movr */ 151 0, /* shift penalty */ 152}; 153 154static const 155struct processor_costs ultrasparc_costs = { 156 COSTS_N_INSNS (2), /* int load */ 157 COSTS_N_INSNS (3), /* int signed load */ 158 COSTS_N_INSNS (2), /* int zeroed load */ 159 COSTS_N_INSNS (2), /* float load */ 160 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* fmov, fneg, fabs */ 161 COSTS_N_INSNS (4), /* fadd, fsub */ 162 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* fcmp */ 163 COSTS_N_INSNS (2), /* fmov, fmovr */ 164 COSTS_N_INSNS (4), /* fmul */ 165 COSTS_N_INSNS (13), /* fdivs */ 166 COSTS_N_INSNS (23), /* fdivd */ 167 COSTS_N_INSNS (13), /* fsqrts */ 168 COSTS_N_INSNS (23), /* fsqrtd */ 169 COSTS_N_INSNS (4), /* imul */ 170 COSTS_N_INSNS (4), /* imulX */ 171 2, /* imul bit factor */ 172 COSTS_N_INSNS (37), /* idiv */ 173 COSTS_N_INSNS (68), /* idivX */ 174 COSTS_N_INSNS (2), /* movcc/movr */ 175 2, /* shift penalty */ 176}; 177 178static const 179struct processor_costs ultrasparc3_costs = { 180 COSTS_N_INSNS (2), /* int load */ 181 COSTS_N_INSNS (3), /* int signed load */ 182 COSTS_N_INSNS (3), /* int zeroed load */ 183 COSTS_N_INSNS (2), /* float load */ 184 COSTS_N_INSNS (3), /* fmov, fneg, fabs */ 185 COSTS_N_INSNS (4), /* fadd, fsub */ 186 COSTS_N_INSNS (5), /* fcmp */ 187 COSTS_N_INSNS (3), /* fmov, fmovr */ 188 COSTS_N_INSNS (4), /* fmul */ 189 COSTS_N_INSNS (17), /* fdivs */ 190 COSTS_N_INSNS (20), /* fdivd */ 191 COSTS_N_INSNS (20), /* fsqrts */ 192 COSTS_N_INSNS (29), /* fsqrtd */ 193 COSTS_N_INSNS (6), /* imul */ 194 COSTS_N_INSNS (6), /* imulX */ 195 0, /* imul bit factor */ 196 COSTS_N_INSNS (40), /* idiv */ 197 COSTS_N_INSNS (71), /* idivX */ 198 COSTS_N_INSNS (2), /* movcc/movr */ 199 0, /* shift penalty */ 200}; 201 202static const 203struct processor_costs niagara_costs = { 204 COSTS_N_INSNS (3), /* int load */ 205 COSTS_N_INSNS (3), /* int signed load */ 206 COSTS_N_INSNS (3), /* int zeroed load */ 207 COSTS_N_INSNS (9), /* float load */ 208 COSTS_N_INSNS (8), /* fmov, fneg, fabs */ 209 COSTS_N_INSNS (8), /* fadd, fsub */ 210 COSTS_N_INSNS (26), /* fcmp */ 211 COSTS_N_INSNS (8), /* fmov, fmovr */ 212 COSTS_N_INSNS (29), /* fmul */ 213 COSTS_N_INSNS (54), /* fdivs */ 214 COSTS_N_INSNS (83), /* fdivd */ 215 COSTS_N_INSNS (100), /* fsqrts - not implemented in hardware */ 216 COSTS_N_INSNS (100), /* fsqrtd - not implemented in hardware */ 217 COSTS_N_INSNS (11), /* imul */ 218 COSTS_N_INSNS (11), /* imulX */ 219 0, /* imul bit factor */ 220 COSTS_N_INSNS (72), /* idiv */ 221 COSTS_N_INSNS (72), /* idivX */ 222 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* movcc/movr */ 223 0, /* shift penalty */ 224}; 225 226static const 227struct processor_costs niagara2_costs = { 228 COSTS_N_INSNS (3), /* int load */ 229 COSTS_N_INSNS (3), /* int signed load */ 230 COSTS_N_INSNS (3), /* int zeroed load */ 231 COSTS_N_INSNS (3), /* float load */ 232 COSTS_N_INSNS (6), /* fmov, fneg, fabs */ 233 COSTS_N_INSNS (6), /* fadd, fsub */ 234 COSTS_N_INSNS (6), /* fcmp */ 235 COSTS_N_INSNS (6), /* fmov, fmovr */ 236 COSTS_N_INSNS (6), /* fmul */ 237 COSTS_N_INSNS (19), /* fdivs */ 238 COSTS_N_INSNS (33), /* fdivd */ 239 COSTS_N_INSNS (19), /* fsqrts */ 240 COSTS_N_INSNS (33), /* fsqrtd */ 241 COSTS_N_INSNS (5), /* imul */ 242 COSTS_N_INSNS (5), /* imulX */ 243 0, /* imul bit factor */ 244 COSTS_N_INSNS (31), /* idiv, average of 12 - 41 cycle range */ 245 COSTS_N_INSNS (31), /* idivX, average of 12 - 41 cycle range */ 246 COSTS_N_INSNS (1), /* movcc/movr */ 247 0, /* shift penalty */ 248}; 249 250const struct processor_costs *sparc_costs = &cypress_costs; 251 252#ifdef HAVE_AS_RELAX_OPTION 253/* If 'as' and 'ld' are relaxing tail call insns into branch always, use 254 "or %o7,%g0,X; call Y; or X,%g0,%o7" always, so that it can be optimized. 255 With sethi/jmp, neither 'as' nor 'ld' has an easy way how to find out if 256 somebody does not branch between the sethi and jmp. */ 257#define LEAF_SIBCALL_SLOT_RESERVED_P 1 258#else 259#define LEAF_SIBCALL_SLOT_RESERVED_P \ 260 ((TARGET_ARCH64 && !TARGET_CM_MEDLOW) || flag_pic) 261#endif 262 263/* Global variables for machine-dependent things. */ 264 265/* Size of frame. Need to know this to emit return insns from leaf procedures. 266 ACTUAL_FSIZE is set by sparc_compute_frame_size() which is called during the 267 reload pass. This is important as the value is later used for scheduling 268 (to see what can go in a delay slot). 269 APPARENT_FSIZE is the size of the stack less the register save area and less 270 the outgoing argument area. It is used when saving call preserved regs. */ 271static HOST_WIDE_INT apparent_fsize; 272static HOST_WIDE_INT actual_fsize; 273 274/* Number of live general or floating point registers needed to be 275 saved (as 4-byte quantities). */ 276static int num_gfregs; 277 278/* The alias set for prologue/epilogue register save/restore. */ 279static GTY(()) alias_set_type sparc_sr_alias_set; 280 281/* The alias set for the structure return value. */ 282static GTY(()) alias_set_type struct_value_alias_set; 283 284/* Vector to say how input registers are mapped to output registers. 285 HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM cannot be remapped by this function to 286 eliminate it. You must use -fomit-frame-pointer to get that. */ 287char leaf_reg_remap[] = 288{ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 289 -1, -1, -1, -1, -1, -1, 14, -1, 290 -1, -1, -1, -1, -1, -1, -1, -1, 291 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, -1, 15, 292 293 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 294 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 295 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 296 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 297 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 298 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 299 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 300 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 301 96, 97, 98, 99, 100}; 302 303/* Vector, indexed by hard register number, which contains 1 304 for a register that is allowable in a candidate for leaf 305 function treatment. */ 306char sparc_leaf_regs[] = 307{ 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 308 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 309 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 310 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 1, 311 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 312 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 313 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 314 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 315 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 316 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 317 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 318 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 319 1, 1, 1, 1, 1}; 320 321struct GTY(()) machine_function 322{ 323 /* Some local-dynamic TLS symbol name. */ 324 const char *some_ld_name; 325 326 /* True if the current function is leaf and uses only leaf regs, 327 so that the SPARC leaf function optimization can be applied. 328 Private version of current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs, see 329 sparc_expand_prologue for the rationale. */ 330 int leaf_function_p; 331 332 /* True if the data calculated by sparc_expand_prologue are valid. */ 333 bool prologue_data_valid_p; 334}; 335 336#define sparc_leaf_function_p cfun->machine->leaf_function_p 337#define sparc_prologue_data_valid_p cfun->machine->prologue_data_valid_p 338 339/* Register we pretend to think the frame pointer is allocated to. 340 Normally, this is %fp, but if we are in a leaf procedure, this 341 is %sp+"something". We record "something" separately as it may 342 be too big for reg+constant addressing. */ 343static rtx frame_base_reg; 344static HOST_WIDE_INT frame_base_offset; 345 346/* 1 if the next opcode is to be specially indented. */ 347int sparc_indent_opcode = 0; 348 349static bool sparc_handle_option (size_t, const char *, int); 350static void sparc_init_modes (void); 351static void scan_record_type (tree, int *, int *, int *); 352static int function_arg_slotno (const CUMULATIVE_ARGS *, enum machine_mode, 353 tree, int, int, int *, int *); 354 355static int supersparc_adjust_cost (rtx, rtx, rtx, int); 356static int hypersparc_adjust_cost (rtx, rtx, rtx, int); 357 358static void sparc_output_addr_vec (rtx); 359static void sparc_output_addr_diff_vec (rtx); 360static void sparc_output_deferred_case_vectors (void); 361static bool sparc_legitimate_address_p (enum machine_mode, rtx, bool); 362static rtx sparc_builtin_saveregs (void); 363static int epilogue_renumber (rtx *, int); 364static bool sparc_assemble_integer (rtx, unsigned int, int); 365static int set_extends (rtx); 366static void load_got_register (void); 367static int save_or_restore_regs (int, int, rtx, int, int); 368static void emit_save_or_restore_regs (int); 369static void sparc_asm_function_prologue (FILE *, HOST_WIDE_INT); 370static void sparc_asm_function_epilogue (FILE *, HOST_WIDE_INT); 371static void sparc_solaris_elf_asm_named_section (const char *, unsigned int, 372 tree) ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED; 373static int sparc_adjust_cost (rtx, rtx, rtx, int); 374static int sparc_issue_rate (void); 375static void sparc_sched_init (FILE *, int, int); 376static int sparc_use_sched_lookahead (void); 377 378static void emit_soft_tfmode_libcall (const char *, int, rtx *); 379static void emit_soft_tfmode_binop (enum rtx_code, rtx *); 380static void emit_soft_tfmode_unop (enum rtx_code, rtx *); 381static void emit_soft_tfmode_cvt (enum rtx_code, rtx *); 382static void emit_hard_tfmode_operation (enum rtx_code, rtx *); 383 384static bool sparc_function_ok_for_sibcall (tree, tree); 385static void sparc_init_libfuncs (void); 386static void sparc_init_builtins (void); 387static void sparc_vis_init_builtins (void); 388static rtx sparc_expand_builtin (tree, rtx, rtx, enum machine_mode, int); 389static tree sparc_fold_builtin (tree, tree, bool); 390static int sparc_vis_mul8x16 (int, int); 391static tree sparc_handle_vis_mul8x16 (int, tree, tree, tree); 392static void sparc_output_mi_thunk (FILE *, tree, HOST_WIDE_INT, 393 HOST_WIDE_INT, tree); 394static bool sparc_can_output_mi_thunk (const_tree, HOST_WIDE_INT, 395 HOST_WIDE_INT, const_tree); 396static struct machine_function * sparc_init_machine_status (void); 397static bool sparc_cannot_force_const_mem (rtx); 398static rtx sparc_tls_get_addr (void); 399static rtx sparc_tls_got (void); 400static const char *get_some_local_dynamic_name (void); 401static int get_some_local_dynamic_name_1 (rtx *, void *); 402static bool sparc_rtx_costs (rtx, int, int, int *, bool); 403static bool sparc_promote_prototypes (const_tree); 404static rtx sparc_struct_value_rtx (tree, int); 405static enum machine_mode sparc_promote_function_mode (const_tree, enum machine_mode, 406 int *, const_tree, int); 407static bool sparc_return_in_memory (const_tree, const_tree); 408static bool sparc_strict_argument_naming (CUMULATIVE_ARGS *); 409static void sparc_va_start (tree, rtx); 410static tree sparc_gimplify_va_arg (tree, tree, gimple_seq *, gimple_seq *); 411static bool sparc_vector_mode_supported_p (enum machine_mode); 412static bool sparc_tls_referenced_p (rtx); 413static rtx legitimize_tls_address (rtx); 414static rtx legitimize_pic_address (rtx, rtx); 415static rtx sparc_legitimize_address (rtx, rtx, enum machine_mode); 416static bool sparc_pass_by_reference (CUMULATIVE_ARGS *, 417 enum machine_mode, const_tree, bool); 418static int sparc_arg_partial_bytes (CUMULATIVE_ARGS *, 419 enum machine_mode, tree, bool); 420static void sparc_dwarf_handle_frame_unspec (const char *, rtx, int); 421static void sparc_output_dwarf_dtprel (FILE *, int, rtx) ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED; 422static void sparc_file_end (void); 423static bool sparc_frame_pointer_required (void); 424static bool sparc_can_eliminate (const int, const int); 425#ifdef TARGET_ALTERNATE_LONG_DOUBLE_MANGLING 426static const char *sparc_mangle_type (const_tree); 427#endif 428static void sparc_trampoline_init (rtx, tree, rtx); 429 430#ifdef SUBTARGET_ATTRIBUTE_TABLE 431/* Table of valid machine attributes. */ 432static const struct attribute_spec sparc_attribute_table[] = 433{ 434 /* { name, min_len, max_len, decl_req, type_req, fn_type_req, handler } */ 435 SUBTARGET_ATTRIBUTE_TABLE, 436 { NULL, 0, 0, false, false, false, NULL } 437}; 438#endif 439 440/* Option handling. */ 441 442/* Parsed value. */ 443enum cmodel sparc_cmodel; 444 445char sparc_hard_reg_printed[8]; 446 447struct sparc_cpu_select sparc_select[] = 448{ 449 /* switch name, tune arch */ 450 { (char *)0, "default", 1, 1 }, 451 { (char *)0, "-mcpu=", 1, 1 }, 452 { (char *)0, "-mtune=", 1, 0 }, 453 { 0, 0, 0, 0 } 454}; 455 456/* CPU type. This is set from TARGET_CPU_DEFAULT and -m{cpu,tune}=xxx. */ 457enum processor_type sparc_cpu; 458 459/* Whether an FPU option was specified. */ 460static bool fpu_option_set = false; 461 462/* Initialize the GCC target structure. */ 463 464/* The default is to use .half rather than .short for aligned HI objects. */ 465#undef TARGET_ASM_ALIGNED_HI_OP 466#define TARGET_ASM_ALIGNED_HI_OP "\t.half\t" 467 468#undef TARGET_ASM_UNALIGNED_HI_OP 469#define TARGET_ASM_UNALIGNED_HI_OP "\t.uahalf\t" 470#undef TARGET_ASM_UNALIGNED_SI_OP 471#define TARGET_ASM_UNALIGNED_SI_OP "\t.uaword\t" 472#undef TARGET_ASM_UNALIGNED_DI_OP 473#define TARGET_ASM_UNALIGNED_DI_OP "\t.uaxword\t" 474 475/* The target hook has to handle DI-mode values. */ 476#undef TARGET_ASM_INTEGER 477#define TARGET_ASM_INTEGER sparc_assemble_integer 478 479#undef TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE 480#define TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE sparc_asm_function_prologue 481#undef TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE 482#define TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE sparc_asm_function_epilogue 483 484#undef TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_COST 485#define TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_COST sparc_adjust_cost 486#undef TARGET_SCHED_ISSUE_RATE 487#define TARGET_SCHED_ISSUE_RATE sparc_issue_rate 488#undef TARGET_SCHED_INIT 489#define TARGET_SCHED_INIT sparc_sched_init 490#undef TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD 491#define TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD sparc_use_sched_lookahead 492 493#undef TARGET_FUNCTION_OK_FOR_SIBCALL 494#define TARGET_FUNCTION_OK_FOR_SIBCALL sparc_function_ok_for_sibcall 495 496#undef TARGET_INIT_LIBFUNCS 497#define TARGET_INIT_LIBFUNCS sparc_init_libfuncs 498#undef TARGET_INIT_BUILTINS 499#define TARGET_INIT_BUILTINS sparc_init_builtins 500 501#undef TARGET_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS 502#define TARGET_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS sparc_legitimize_address 503 504#undef TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN 505#define TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN sparc_expand_builtin 506#undef TARGET_FOLD_BUILTIN 507#define TARGET_FOLD_BUILTIN sparc_fold_builtin 508 509#if TARGET_TLS 510#undef TARGET_HAVE_TLS 511#define TARGET_HAVE_TLS true 512#endif 513 514#undef TARGET_CANNOT_FORCE_CONST_MEM 515#define TARGET_CANNOT_FORCE_CONST_MEM sparc_cannot_force_const_mem 516 517#undef TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK 518#define TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK sparc_output_mi_thunk 519#undef TARGET_ASM_CAN_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK 520#define TARGET_ASM_CAN_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK sparc_can_output_mi_thunk 521 522#undef TARGET_RTX_COSTS 523#define TARGET_RTX_COSTS sparc_rtx_costs 524#undef TARGET_ADDRESS_COST 525#define TARGET_ADDRESS_COST hook_int_rtx_bool_0 526 527#undef TARGET_PROMOTE_FUNCTION_MODE 528#define TARGET_PROMOTE_FUNCTION_MODE sparc_promote_function_mode 529 530#undef TARGET_PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES 531#define TARGET_PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES sparc_promote_prototypes 532 533#undef TARGET_STRUCT_VALUE_RTX 534#define TARGET_STRUCT_VALUE_RTX sparc_struct_value_rtx 535#undef TARGET_RETURN_IN_MEMORY 536#define TARGET_RETURN_IN_MEMORY sparc_return_in_memory 537#undef TARGET_MUST_PASS_IN_STACK 538#define TARGET_MUST_PASS_IN_STACK must_pass_in_stack_var_size 539#undef TARGET_PASS_BY_REFERENCE 540#define TARGET_PASS_BY_REFERENCE sparc_pass_by_reference 541#undef TARGET_ARG_PARTIAL_BYTES 542#define TARGET_ARG_PARTIAL_BYTES sparc_arg_partial_bytes 543 544#undef TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS 545#define TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS sparc_builtin_saveregs 546#undef TARGET_STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING 547#define TARGET_STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING sparc_strict_argument_naming 548 549#undef TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_VA_START 550#define TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_VA_START sparc_va_start 551#undef TARGET_GIMPLIFY_VA_ARG_EXPR 552#define TARGET_GIMPLIFY_VA_ARG_EXPR sparc_gimplify_va_arg 553 554#undef TARGET_VECTOR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P 555#define TARGET_VECTOR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P sparc_vector_mode_supported_p 556 557#undef TARGET_DWARF_HANDLE_FRAME_UNSPEC 558#define TARGET_DWARF_HANDLE_FRAME_UNSPEC sparc_dwarf_handle_frame_unspec 559 560#ifdef SUBTARGET_INSERT_ATTRIBUTES 561#undef TARGET_INSERT_ATTRIBUTES 562#define TARGET_INSERT_ATTRIBUTES SUBTARGET_INSERT_ATTRIBUTES 563#endif 564 565#ifdef SUBTARGET_ATTRIBUTE_TABLE 566#undef TARGET_ATTRIBUTE_TABLE 567#define TARGET_ATTRIBUTE_TABLE sparc_attribute_table 568#endif 569 570#undef TARGET_RELAXED_ORDERING 571#define TARGET_RELAXED_ORDERING SPARC_RELAXED_ORDERING 572 573#undef TARGET_DEFAULT_TARGET_FLAGS 574#define TARGET_DEFAULT_TARGET_FLAGS TARGET_DEFAULT 575#undef TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION 576#define TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION sparc_handle_option 577 578#if TARGET_GNU_TLS && defined(HAVE_AS_SPARC_UA_PCREL) 579#undef TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DTPREL 580#define TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DTPREL sparc_output_dwarf_dtprel 581#endif 582 583#undef TARGET_ASM_FILE_END 584#define TARGET_ASM_FILE_END sparc_file_end 585 586#undef TARGET_FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED 587#define TARGET_FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED sparc_frame_pointer_required 588 589#undef TARGET_CAN_ELIMINATE 590#define TARGET_CAN_ELIMINATE sparc_can_eliminate 591 592#ifdef TARGET_ALTERNATE_LONG_DOUBLE_MANGLING 593#undef TARGET_MANGLE_TYPE 594#define TARGET_MANGLE_TYPE sparc_mangle_type 595#endif 596 597#undef TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P 598#define TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P sparc_legitimate_address_p 599 600#undef TARGET_TRAMPOLINE_INIT 601#define TARGET_TRAMPOLINE_INIT sparc_trampoline_init 602 603struct gcc_target targetm = TARGET_INITIALIZER; 604 605/* Implement TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION. */ 606 607static bool 608sparc_handle_option (size_t code, const char *arg, int value ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED) 609{ 610 switch (code) 611 { 612 case OPT_mfpu: 613 case OPT_mhard_float: 614 case OPT_msoft_float: 615 fpu_option_set = true; 616 break; 617 618 case OPT_mcpu_: 619 sparc_select[1].string = arg; 620 break; 621 622 case OPT_mtune_: 623 sparc_select[2].string = arg; 624 break; 625 } 626 627 return true; 628} 629 630/* Specify default optimizations. */ 631 632void 633sparc_optimization_options (int l ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, int s ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED) 634{ 635 /* Disable save slot sharing for call-clobbered registers by default. 636 The IRA sharing algorithm works on single registers only and this 637 pessimizes for double floating-point registers. */ 638 flag_ira_share_save_slots = 0; 639} 640 641/* Validate and override various options, and do some machine dependent 642 initialization. */ 643 644void 645sparc_override_options (void) 646{ 647 static struct code_model { 648 const char *const name; 649 const enum cmodel value; 650 } const cmodels[] = { 651 { "32", CM_32 }, 652 { "medlow", CM_MEDLOW }, 653 { "medmid", CM_MEDMID }, 654 { "medany", CM_MEDANY }, 655 { "embmedany", CM_EMBMEDANY }, 656 { NULL, (enum cmodel) 0 } 657 }; 658 const struct code_model *cmodel; 659 /* Map TARGET_CPU_DEFAULT to value for -m{arch,tune}=. */ 660 static struct cpu_default { 661 const int cpu; 662 const char *const name; 663 } const cpu_default[] = { 664 /* There must be one entry here for each TARGET_CPU value. */ 665 { TARGET_CPU_sparc, "cypress" }, 666 { TARGET_CPU_sparclet, "tsc701" }, 667 { TARGET_CPU_sparclite, "f930" }, 668 { TARGET_CPU_v8, "v8" }, 669 { TARGET_CPU_hypersparc, "hypersparc" }, 670 { TARGET_CPU_sparclite86x, "sparclite86x" }, 671 { TARGET_CPU_supersparc, "supersparc" }, 672 { TARGET_CPU_v9, "v9" }, 673 { TARGET_CPU_ultrasparc, "ultrasparc" }, 674 { TARGET_CPU_ultrasparc3, "ultrasparc3" }, 675 { TARGET_CPU_niagara, "niagara" }, 676 { TARGET_CPU_niagara2, "niagara2" }, 677 { 0, 0 } 678 }; 679 const struct cpu_default *def; 680 /* Table of values for -m{cpu,tune}=. */ 681 static struct cpu_table { 682 const char *const name; 683 const enum processor_type processor; 684 const int disable; 685 const int enable; 686 } const cpu_table[] = { 687 { "v7", PROCESSOR_V7, MASK_ISA, 0 }, 688 { "cypress", PROCESSOR_CYPRESS, MASK_ISA, 0 }, 689 { "v8", PROCESSOR_V8, MASK_ISA, MASK_V8 }, 690 /* TI TMS390Z55 supersparc */ 691 { "supersparc", PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC, MASK_ISA, MASK_V8 }, 692 { "sparclite", PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE, MASK_ISA, MASK_SPARCLITE }, 693 /* The Fujitsu MB86930 is the original sparclite chip, with no fpu. 694 The Fujitsu MB86934 is the recent sparclite chip, with an fpu. */ 695 { "f930", PROCESSOR_F930, MASK_ISA|MASK_FPU, MASK_SPARCLITE }, 696 { "f934", PROCESSOR_F934, MASK_ISA, MASK_SPARCLITE|MASK_FPU }, 697 { "hypersparc", PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC, MASK_ISA, MASK_V8|MASK_FPU }, 698 { "sparclite86x", PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X, MASK_ISA|MASK_FPU, 699 MASK_SPARCLITE }, 700 { "sparclet", PROCESSOR_SPARCLET, MASK_ISA, MASK_SPARCLET }, 701 /* TEMIC sparclet */ 702 { "tsc701", PROCESSOR_TSC701, MASK_ISA, MASK_SPARCLET }, 703 { "v9", PROCESSOR_V9, MASK_ISA, MASK_V9 }, 704 /* TI ultrasparc I, II, IIi */ 705 { "ultrasparc", PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC, MASK_ISA, MASK_V9 706 /* Although insns using %y are deprecated, it is a clear win on current 707 ultrasparcs. */ 708 |MASK_DEPRECATED_V8_INSNS}, 709 /* TI ultrasparc III */ 710 /* ??? Check if %y issue still holds true in ultra3. */ 711 { "ultrasparc3", PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3, MASK_ISA, MASK_V9|MASK_DEPRECATED_V8_INSNS}, 712 /* UltraSPARC T1 */ 713 { "niagara", PROCESSOR_NIAGARA, MASK_ISA, MASK_V9|MASK_DEPRECATED_V8_INSNS}, 714 { "niagara2", PROCESSOR_NIAGARA, MASK_ISA, MASK_V9}, 715 { 0, (enum processor_type) 0, 0, 0 } 716 }; 717 const struct cpu_table *cpu; 718 const struct sparc_cpu_select *sel; 719 int fpu; 720 721#ifndef SPARC_BI_ARCH 722 /* Check for unsupported architecture size. */ 723 if (! TARGET_64BIT != DEFAULT_ARCH32_P) 724 error ("%s is not supported by this configuration", 725 DEFAULT_ARCH32_P ? "-m64" : "-m32"); 726#endif 727 728 /* We force all 64bit archs to use 128 bit long double */ 729 if (TARGET_64BIT && ! TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE_128) 730 { 731 error ("-mlong-double-64 not allowed with -m64"); 732 target_flags |= MASK_LONG_DOUBLE_128; 733 } 734 735 /* Code model selection. */ 736 sparc_cmodel = SPARC_DEFAULT_CMODEL; 737 738#ifdef SPARC_BI_ARCH 739 if (TARGET_ARCH32) 740 sparc_cmodel = CM_32; 741#endif 742 743 if (sparc_cmodel_string != NULL) 744 { 745 if (TARGET_ARCH64) 746 { 747 for (cmodel = &cmodels[0]; cmodel->name; cmodel++) 748 if (strcmp (sparc_cmodel_string, cmodel->name) == 0) 749 break; 750 if (cmodel->name == NULL) 751 error ("bad value (%s) for -mcmodel= switch", sparc_cmodel_string); 752 else 753 sparc_cmodel = cmodel->value; 754 } 755 else 756 error ("-mcmodel= is not supported on 32 bit systems"); 757 } 758 759 fpu = target_flags & MASK_FPU; /* save current -mfpu status */ 760 761 /* Set the default CPU. */ 762 for (def = &cpu_default[0]; def->name; ++def) 763 if (def->cpu == TARGET_CPU_DEFAULT) 764 break; 765 gcc_assert (def->name); 766 sparc_select[0].string = def->name; 767 768 for (sel = &sparc_select[0]; sel->name; ++sel) 769 { 770 if (sel->string) 771 { 772 for (cpu = &cpu_table[0]; cpu->name; ++cpu) 773 if (! strcmp (sel->string, cpu->name)) 774 { 775 if (sel->set_tune_p) 776 sparc_cpu = cpu->processor; 777 778 if (sel->set_arch_p) 779 { 780 target_flags &= ~cpu->disable; 781 target_flags |= cpu->enable; 782 } 783 break; 784 } 785 786 if (! cpu->name) 787 error ("bad value (%s) for %s switch", sel->string, sel->name); 788 } 789 } 790 791 /* If -mfpu or -mno-fpu was explicitly used, don't override with 792 the processor default. */ 793 if (fpu_option_set) 794 target_flags = (target_flags & ~MASK_FPU) | fpu; 795 796 /* Don't allow -mvis if FPU is disabled. */ 797 if (! TARGET_FPU) 798 target_flags &= ~MASK_VIS; 799 800 /* -mvis assumes UltraSPARC+, so we are sure v9 instructions 801 are available. 802 -m64 also implies v9. */ 803 if (TARGET_VIS || TARGET_ARCH64) 804 { 805 target_flags |= MASK_V9; 806 target_flags &= ~(MASK_V8 | MASK_SPARCLET | MASK_SPARCLITE); 807 } 808 809 /* Use the deprecated v8 insns for sparc64 in 32 bit mode. */ 810 if (TARGET_V9 && TARGET_ARCH32) 811 target_flags |= MASK_DEPRECATED_V8_INSNS; 812 813 /* V8PLUS requires V9, makes no sense in 64 bit mode. */ 814 if (! TARGET_V9 || TARGET_ARCH64) 815 target_flags &= ~MASK_V8PLUS; 816 817 /* Don't use stack biasing in 32 bit mode. */ 818 if (TARGET_ARCH32) 819 target_flags &= ~MASK_STACK_BIAS; 820 821 /* Supply a default value for align_functions. */ 822 if (align_functions == 0 823 && (sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC 824 || sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3 825 || sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_NIAGARA 826 || sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_NIAGARA2)) 827 align_functions = 32; 828 829 /* Validate PCC_STRUCT_RETURN. */ 830 if (flag_pcc_struct_return == DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN) 831 flag_pcc_struct_return = (TARGET_ARCH64 ? 0 : 1); 832 833 /* Only use .uaxword when compiling for a 64-bit target. */ 834 if (!TARGET_ARCH64) 835 targetm.asm_out.unaligned_op.di = NULL; 836 837 /* Do various machine dependent initializations. */ 838 sparc_init_modes (); 839 840 /* Acquire unique alias sets for our private stuff. */ 841 sparc_sr_alias_set = new_alias_set (); 842 struct_value_alias_set = new_alias_set (); 843 844 /* Set up function hooks. */ 845 init_machine_status = sparc_init_machine_status; 846 847 switch (sparc_cpu) 848 { 849 case PROCESSOR_V7: 850 case PROCESSOR_CYPRESS: 851 sparc_costs = &cypress_costs; 852 break; 853 case PROCESSOR_V8: 854 case PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE: 855 case PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC: 856 sparc_costs = &supersparc_costs; 857 break; 858 case PROCESSOR_F930: 859 case PROCESSOR_F934: 860 case PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC: 861 case PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X: 862 sparc_costs = &hypersparc_costs; 863 break; 864 case PROCESSOR_SPARCLET: 865 case PROCESSOR_TSC701: 866 sparc_costs = &sparclet_costs; 867 break; 868 case PROCESSOR_V9: 869 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC: 870 sparc_costs = &ultrasparc_costs; 871 break; 872 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3: 873 sparc_costs = &ultrasparc3_costs; 874 break; 875 case PROCESSOR_NIAGARA: 876 sparc_costs = &niagara_costs; 877 break; 878 case PROCESSOR_NIAGARA2: 879 sparc_costs = &niagara2_costs; 880 break; 881 }; 882 883#ifdef TARGET_DEFAULT_LONG_DOUBLE_128 884 if (!(target_flags_explicit & MASK_LONG_DOUBLE_128)) 885 target_flags |= MASK_LONG_DOUBLE_128; 886#endif 887 888 if (!PARAM_SET_P (PARAM_SIMULTANEOUS_PREFETCHES)) 889 set_param_value ("simultaneous-prefetches", 890 ((sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC 891 || sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_NIAGARA 892 || sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_NIAGARA2) 893 ? 2 894 : (sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3 895 ? 8 : 3))); 896 if (!PARAM_SET_P (PARAM_L1_CACHE_LINE_SIZE)) 897 set_param_value ("l1-cache-line-size", 898 ((sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC 899 || sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3 900 || sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_NIAGARA 901 || sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_NIAGARA2) 902 ? 64 : 32)); 903} 904 905/* Miscellaneous utilities. */ 906 907/* Nonzero if CODE, a comparison, is suitable for use in v9 conditional move 908 or branch on register contents instructions. */ 909 910int 911v9_regcmp_p (enum rtx_code code) 912{ 913 return (code == EQ || code == NE || code == GE || code == LT 914 || code == LE || code == GT); 915} 916 917/* Nonzero if OP is a floating point constant which can 918 be loaded into an integer register using a single 919 sethi instruction. */ 920 921int 922fp_sethi_p (rtx op) 923{ 924 if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE) 925 { 926 REAL_VALUE_TYPE r; 927 long i; 928 929 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (r, op); 930 REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (r, i); 931 return !SPARC_SIMM13_P (i) && SPARC_SETHI_P (i); 932 } 933 934 return 0; 935} 936 937/* Nonzero if OP is a floating point constant which can 938 be loaded into an integer register using a single 939 mov instruction. */ 940 941int 942fp_mov_p (rtx op) 943{ 944 if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE) 945 { 946 REAL_VALUE_TYPE r; 947 long i; 948 949 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (r, op); 950 REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (r, i); 951 return SPARC_SIMM13_P (i); 952 } 953 954 return 0; 955} 956 957/* Nonzero if OP is a floating point constant which can 958 be loaded into an integer register using a high/losum 959 instruction sequence. */ 960 961int 962fp_high_losum_p (rtx op) 963{ 964 /* The constraints calling this should only be in 965 SFmode move insns, so any constant which cannot 966 be moved using a single insn will do. */ 967 if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE) 968 { 969 REAL_VALUE_TYPE r; 970 long i; 971 972 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (r, op); 973 REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (r, i); 974 return !SPARC_SIMM13_P (i) && !SPARC_SETHI_P (i); 975 } 976 977 return 0; 978} 979 980/* Return true if the address of LABEL can be loaded by means of the 981 mov{si,di}_pic_label_ref patterns in PIC mode. */ 982 983static bool 984can_use_mov_pic_label_ref (rtx label) 985{ 986 /* VxWorks does not impose a fixed gap between segments; the run-time 987 gap can be different from the object-file gap. We therefore can't 988 assume X - _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ is a link-time constant unless we 989 are absolutely sure that X is in the same segment as the GOT. 990 Unfortunately, the flexibility of linker scripts means that we 991 can't be sure of that in general, so assume that GOT-relative 992 accesses are never valid on VxWorks. */ 993 if (TARGET_VXWORKS_RTP) 994 return false; 995 996 /* Similarly, if the label is non-local, it might end up being placed 997 in a different section than the current one; now mov_pic_label_ref 998 requires the label and the code to be in the same section. */ 999 if (LABEL_REF_NONLOCAL_P (label)) 1000 return false; 1001 1002 /* Finally, if we are reordering basic blocks and partition into hot 1003 and cold sections, this might happen for any label. */ 1004 if (flag_reorder_blocks_and_partition) 1005 return false; 1006 1007 return true; 1008} 1009 1010/* Expand a move instruction. Return true if all work is done. */ 1011 1012bool 1013sparc_expand_move (enum machine_mode mode, rtx *operands) 1014{ 1015 /* Handle sets of MEM first. */ 1016 if (GET_CODE (operands[0]) == MEM) 1017 { 1018 /* 0 is a register (or a pair of registers) on SPARC. */ 1019 if (register_or_zero_operand (operands[1], mode)) 1020 return false; 1021 1022 if (!reload_in_progress) 1023 { 1024 operands[0] = validize_mem (operands[0]); 1025 operands[1] = force_reg (mode, operands[1]); 1026 } 1027 } 1028 1029 /* Fixup TLS cases. */ 1030 if (TARGET_HAVE_TLS 1031 && CONSTANT_P (operands[1]) 1032 && sparc_tls_referenced_p (operands [1])) 1033 { 1034 operands[1] = legitimize_tls_address (operands[1]); 1035 return false; 1036 } 1037 1038 /* Fixup PIC cases. */ 1039 if (flag_pic && CONSTANT_P (operands[1])) 1040 { 1041 if (pic_address_needs_scratch (operands[1])) 1042 operands[1] = legitimize_pic_address (operands[1], NULL_RTX); 1043 1044 /* We cannot use the mov{si,di}_pic_label_ref patterns in all cases. */ 1045 if (GET_CODE (operands[1]) == LABEL_REF 1046 && can_use_mov_pic_label_ref (operands[1])) 1047 { 1048 if (mode == SImode) 1049 { 1050 emit_insn (gen_movsi_pic_label_ref (operands[0], operands[1])); 1051 return true; 1052 } 1053 1054 if (mode == DImode) 1055 { 1056 gcc_assert (TARGET_ARCH64); 1057 emit_insn (gen_movdi_pic_label_ref (operands[0], operands[1])); 1058 return true; 1059 } 1060 } 1061 1062 if (symbolic_operand (operands[1], mode)) 1063 { 1064 operands[1] = legitimize_pic_address (operands[1], 1065 reload_in_progress 1066 ? operands[0] : NULL_RTX); 1067 return false; 1068 } 1069 } 1070 1071 /* If we are trying to toss an integer constant into FP registers, 1072 or loading a FP or vector constant, force it into memory. */ 1073 if (CONSTANT_P (operands[1]) 1074 && REG_P (operands[0]) 1075 && (SPARC_FP_REG_P (REGNO (operands[0])) 1076 || SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (mode) 1077 || VECTOR_MODE_P (mode))) 1078 { 1079 /* emit_group_store will send such bogosity to us when it is 1080 not storing directly into memory. So fix this up to avoid 1081 crashes in output_constant_pool. */ 1082 if (operands [1] == const0_rtx) 1083 operands[1] = CONST0_RTX (mode); 1084 1085 /* We can clear FP registers if TARGET_VIS, and always other regs. */ 1086 if ((TARGET_VIS || REGNO (operands[0]) < SPARC_FIRST_FP_REG) 1087 && const_zero_operand (operands[1], mode)) 1088 return false; 1089 1090 if (REGNO (operands[0]) < SPARC_FIRST_FP_REG 1091 /* We are able to build any SF constant in integer registers 1092 with at most 2 instructions. */ 1093 && (mode == SFmode 1094 /* And any DF constant in integer registers. */ 1095 || (mode == DFmode 1096 && (reload_completed || reload_in_progress)))) 1097 return false; 1098 1099 operands[1] = force_const_mem (mode, operands[1]); 1100 if (!reload_in_progress) 1101 operands[1] = validize_mem (operands[1]); 1102 return false; 1103 } 1104 1105 /* Accept non-constants and valid constants unmodified. */ 1106 if (!CONSTANT_P (operands[1]) 1107 || GET_CODE (operands[1]) == HIGH 1108 || input_operand (operands[1], mode)) 1109 return false; 1110 1111 switch (mode) 1112 { 1113 case QImode: 1114 /* All QImode constants require only one insn, so proceed. */ 1115 break; 1116 1117 case HImode: 1118 case SImode: 1119 sparc_emit_set_const32 (operands[0], operands[1]); 1120 return true; 1121 1122 case DImode: 1123 /* input_operand should have filtered out 32-bit mode. */ 1124 sparc_emit_set_const64 (operands[0], operands[1]); 1125 return true; 1126 1127 default: 1128 gcc_unreachable (); 1129 } 1130 1131 return false; 1132} 1133 1134/* Load OP1, a 32-bit constant, into OP0, a register. 1135 We know it can't be done in one insn when we get 1136 here, the move expander guarantees this. */ 1137 1138void 1139sparc_emit_set_const32 (rtx op0, rtx op1) 1140{ 1141 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (op0); 1142 rtx temp; 1143 1144 if (reload_in_progress || reload_completed) 1145 temp = op0; 1146 else 1147 temp = gen_reg_rtx (mode); 1148 1149 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT) 1150 { 1151 gcc_assert (!small_int_operand (op1, mode) 1152 && !const_high_operand (op1, mode)); 1153 1154 /* Emit them as real moves instead of a HIGH/LO_SUM, 1155 this way CSE can see everything and reuse intermediate 1156 values if it wants. */ 1157 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, temp, 1158 GEN_INT (INTVAL (op1) 1159 & ~(HOST_WIDE_INT)0x3ff))); 1160 1161 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, 1162 op0, 1163 gen_rtx_IOR (mode, temp, 1164 GEN_INT (INTVAL (op1) & 0x3ff)))); 1165 } 1166 else 1167 { 1168 /* A symbol, emit in the traditional way. */ 1169 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, temp, 1170 gen_rtx_HIGH (mode, op1))); 1171 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, 1172 op0, gen_rtx_LO_SUM (mode, temp, op1))); 1173 } 1174} 1175 1176/* Load OP1, a symbolic 64-bit constant, into OP0, a DImode register. 1177 If TEMP is nonzero, we are forbidden to use any other scratch 1178 registers. Otherwise, we are allowed to generate them as needed. 1179 1180 Note that TEMP may have TImode if the code model is TARGET_CM_MEDANY 1181 or TARGET_CM_EMBMEDANY (see the reload_indi and reload_outdi patterns). */ 1182 1183void 1184sparc_emit_set_symbolic_const64 (rtx op0, rtx op1, rtx temp) 1185{ 1186 rtx temp1, temp2, temp3, temp4, temp5; 1187 rtx ti_temp = 0; 1188 1189 if (temp && GET_MODE (temp) == TImode) 1190 { 1191 ti_temp = temp; 1192 temp = gen_rtx_REG (DImode, REGNO (temp)); 1193 } 1194 1195 /* SPARC-V9 code-model support. */ 1196 switch (sparc_cmodel) 1197 { 1198 case CM_MEDLOW: 1199 /* The range spanned by all instructions in the object is less 1200 than 2^31 bytes (2GB) and the distance from any instruction 1201 to the location of the label _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ is less 1202 than 2^31 bytes (2GB). 1203 1204 The executable must be in the low 4TB of the virtual address 1205 space. 1206 1207 sethi %hi(symbol), %temp1 1208 or %temp1, %lo(symbol), %reg */ 1209 if (temp) 1210 temp1 = temp; /* op0 is allowed. */ 1211 else 1212 temp1 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode); 1213 1214 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, temp1, gen_rtx_HIGH (DImode, op1))); 1215 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0, gen_rtx_LO_SUM (DImode, temp1, op1))); 1216 break; 1217 1218 case CM_MEDMID: 1219 /* The range spanned by all instructions in the object is less 1220 than 2^31 bytes (2GB) and the distance from any instruction 1221 to the location of the label _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ is less 1222 than 2^31 bytes (2GB). 1223 1224 The executable must be in the low 16TB of the virtual address 1225 space. 1226 1227 sethi %h44(symbol), %temp1 1228 or %temp1, %m44(symbol), %temp2 1229 sllx %temp2, 12, %temp3 1230 or %temp3, %l44(symbol), %reg */ 1231 if (temp) 1232 { 1233 temp1 = op0; 1234 temp2 = op0; 1235 temp3 = temp; /* op0 is allowed. */ 1236 } 1237 else 1238 { 1239 temp1 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode); 1240 temp2 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode); 1241 temp3 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode); 1242 } 1243 1244 emit_insn (gen_seth44 (temp1, op1)); 1245 emit_insn (gen_setm44 (temp2, temp1, op1)); 1246 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, temp3, 1247 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, temp2, GEN_INT (12)))); 1248 emit_insn (gen_setl44 (op0, temp3, op1)); 1249 break; 1250 1251 case CM_MEDANY: 1252 /* The range spanned by all instructions in the object is less 1253 than 2^31 bytes (2GB) and the distance from any instruction 1254 to the location of the label _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ is less 1255 than 2^31 bytes (2GB). 1256 1257 The executable can be placed anywhere in the virtual address 1258 space. 1259 1260 sethi %hh(symbol), %temp1 1261 sethi %lm(symbol), %temp2 1262 or %temp1, %hm(symbol), %temp3 1263 sllx %temp3, 32, %temp4 1264 or %temp4, %temp2, %temp5 1265 or %temp5, %lo(symbol), %reg */ 1266 if (temp) 1267 { 1268 /* It is possible that one of the registers we got for operands[2] 1269 might coincide with that of operands[0] (which is why we made 1270 it TImode). Pick the other one to use as our scratch. */ 1271 if (rtx_equal_p (temp, op0)) 1272 { 1273 gcc_assert (ti_temp); 1274 temp = gen_rtx_REG (DImode, REGNO (temp) + 1); 1275 } 1276 temp1 = op0; 1277 temp2 = temp; /* op0 is _not_ allowed, see above. */ 1278 temp3 = op0; 1279 temp4 = op0; 1280 temp5 = op0; 1281 } 1282 else 1283 { 1284 temp1 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode); 1285 temp2 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode); 1286 temp3 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode); 1287 temp4 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode); 1288 temp5 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode); 1289 } 1290 1291 emit_insn (gen_sethh (temp1, op1)); 1292 emit_insn (gen_setlm (temp2, op1)); 1293 emit_insn (gen_sethm (temp3, temp1, op1)); 1294 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, temp4, 1295 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, temp3, GEN_INT (32)))); 1296 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, temp5, 1297 gen_rtx_PLUS (DImode, temp4, temp2))); 1298 emit_insn (gen_setlo (op0, temp5, op1)); 1299 break; 1300 1301 case CM_EMBMEDANY: 1302 /* Old old old backwards compatibility kruft here. 1303 Essentially it is MEDLOW with a fixed 64-bit 1304 virtual base added to all data segment addresses. 1305 Text-segment stuff is computed like MEDANY, we can't 1306 reuse the code above because the relocation knobs 1307 look different. 1308 1309 Data segment: sethi %hi(symbol), %temp1 1310 add %temp1, EMBMEDANY_BASE_REG, %temp2 1311 or %temp2, %lo(symbol), %reg */ 1312 if (data_segment_operand (op1, GET_MODE (op1))) 1313 { 1314 if (temp) 1315 { 1316 temp1 = temp; /* op0 is allowed. */ 1317 temp2 = op0; 1318 } 1319 else 1320 { 1321 temp1 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode); 1322 temp2 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode); 1323 } 1324 1325 emit_insn (gen_embmedany_sethi (temp1, op1)); 1326 emit_insn (gen_embmedany_brsum (temp2, temp1)); 1327 emit_insn (gen_embmedany_losum (op0, temp2, op1)); 1328 } 1329 1330 /* Text segment: sethi %uhi(symbol), %temp1 1331 sethi %hi(symbol), %temp2 1332 or %temp1, %ulo(symbol), %temp3 1333 sllx %temp3, 32, %temp4 1334 or %temp4, %temp2, %temp5 1335 or %temp5, %lo(symbol), %reg */ 1336 else 1337 { 1338 if (temp) 1339 { 1340 /* It is possible that one of the registers we got for operands[2] 1341 might coincide with that of operands[0] (which is why we made 1342 it TImode). Pick the other one to use as our scratch. */ 1343 if (rtx_equal_p (temp, op0)) 1344 { 1345 gcc_assert (ti_temp); 1346 temp = gen_rtx_REG (DImode, REGNO (temp) + 1); 1347 } 1348 temp1 = op0; 1349 temp2 = temp; /* op0 is _not_ allowed, see above. */ 1350 temp3 = op0; 1351 temp4 = op0; 1352 temp5 = op0; 1353 } 1354 else 1355 { 1356 temp1 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode); 1357 temp2 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode); 1358 temp3 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode); 1359 temp4 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode); 1360 temp5 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode); 1361 } 1362 1363 emit_insn (gen_embmedany_textuhi (temp1, op1)); 1364 emit_insn (gen_embmedany_texthi (temp2, op1)); 1365 emit_insn (gen_embmedany_textulo (temp3, temp1, op1)); 1366 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, temp4, 1367 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, temp3, GEN_INT (32)))); 1368 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, temp5, 1369 gen_rtx_PLUS (DImode, temp4, temp2))); 1370 emit_insn (gen_embmedany_textlo (op0, temp5, op1)); 1371 } 1372 break; 1373 1374 default: 1375 gcc_unreachable (); 1376 } 1377} 1378 1379#if HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT == 32 1380void 1381sparc_emit_set_const64 (rtx op0 ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, rtx op1 ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED) 1382{ 1383 gcc_unreachable (); 1384} 1385#else 1386/* These avoid problems when cross compiling. If we do not 1387 go through all this hair then the optimizer will see 1388 invalid REG_EQUAL notes or in some cases none at all. */ 1389static rtx gen_safe_HIGH64 (rtx, HOST_WIDE_INT); 1390static rtx gen_safe_SET64 (rtx, HOST_WIDE_INT); 1391static rtx gen_safe_OR64 (rtx, HOST_WIDE_INT); 1392static rtx gen_safe_XOR64 (rtx, HOST_WIDE_INT); 1393 1394/* The optimizer is not to assume anything about exactly 1395 which bits are set for a HIGH, they are unspecified. 1396 Unfortunately this leads to many missed optimizations 1397 during CSE. We mask out the non-HIGH bits, and matches 1398 a plain movdi, to alleviate this problem. */ 1399static rtx 1400gen_safe_HIGH64 (rtx dest, HOST_WIDE_INT val) 1401{ 1402 return gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, dest, GEN_INT (val & ~(HOST_WIDE_INT)0x3ff)); 1403} 1404 1405static rtx 1406gen_safe_SET64 (rtx dest, HOST_WIDE_INT val) 1407{ 1408 return gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, dest, GEN_INT (val)); 1409} 1410 1411static rtx 1412gen_safe_OR64 (rtx src, HOST_WIDE_INT val) 1413{ 1414 return gen_rtx_IOR (DImode, src, GEN_INT (val)); 1415} 1416 1417static rtx 1418gen_safe_XOR64 (rtx src, HOST_WIDE_INT val) 1419{ 1420 return gen_rtx_XOR (DImode, src, GEN_INT (val)); 1421} 1422 1423/* Worker routines for 64-bit constant formation on arch64. 1424 One of the key things to be doing in these emissions is 1425 to create as many temp REGs as possible. This makes it 1426 possible for half-built constants to be used later when 1427 such values are similar to something required later on. 1428 Without doing this, the optimizer cannot see such 1429 opportunities. */ 1430 1431static void sparc_emit_set_const64_quick1 (rtx, rtx, 1432 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, int); 1433 1434static void 1435sparc_emit_set_const64_quick1 (rtx op0, rtx temp, 1436 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT low_bits, int is_neg) 1437{ 1438 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT high_bits; 1439 1440 if (is_neg) 1441 high_bits = (~low_bits) & 0xffffffff; 1442 else 1443 high_bits = low_bits; 1444 1445 emit_insn (gen_safe_HIGH64 (temp, high_bits)); 1446 if (!is_neg) 1447 { 1448 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0, 1449 gen_safe_OR64 (temp, (high_bits & 0x3ff)))); 1450 } 1451 else 1452 { 1453 /* If we are XOR'ing with -1, then we should emit a one's complement 1454 instead. This way the combiner will notice logical operations 1455 such as ANDN later on and substitute. */ 1456 if ((low_bits & 0x3ff) == 0x3ff) 1457 { 1458 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0, 1459 gen_rtx_NOT (DImode, temp))); 1460 } 1461 else 1462 { 1463 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0, 1464 gen_safe_XOR64 (temp, 1465 (-(HOST_WIDE_INT)0x400 1466 | (low_bits & 0x3ff))))); 1467 } 1468 } 1469} 1470 1471static void sparc_emit_set_const64_quick2 (rtx, rtx, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, 1472 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, int); 1473 1474static void 1475sparc_emit_set_const64_quick2 (rtx op0, rtx temp, 1476 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT high_bits, 1477 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT low_immediate, 1478 int shift_count) 1479{ 1480 rtx temp2 = op0; 1481 1482 if ((high_bits & 0xfffffc00) != 0) 1483 { 1484 emit_insn (gen_safe_HIGH64 (temp, high_bits)); 1485 if ((high_bits & ~0xfffffc00) != 0) 1486 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0, 1487 gen_safe_OR64 (temp, (high_bits & 0x3ff)))); 1488 else 1489 temp2 = temp; 1490 } 1491 else 1492 { 1493 emit_insn (gen_safe_SET64 (temp, high_bits)); 1494 temp2 = temp; 1495 } 1496 1497 /* Now shift it up into place. */ 1498 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0, 1499 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, temp2, 1500 GEN_INT (shift_count)))); 1501 1502 /* If there is a low immediate part piece, finish up by 1503 putting that in as well. */ 1504 if (low_immediate != 0) 1505 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0, 1506 gen_safe_OR64 (op0, low_immediate))); 1507} 1508 1509static void sparc_emit_set_const64_longway (rtx, rtx, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, 1510 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT); 1511 1512/* Full 64-bit constant decomposition. Even though this is the 1513 'worst' case, we still optimize a few things away. */ 1514static void 1515sparc_emit_set_const64_longway (rtx op0, rtx temp, 1516 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT high_bits, 1517 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT low_bits) 1518{ 1519 rtx sub_temp; 1520 1521 if (reload_in_progress || reload_completed) 1522 sub_temp = op0; 1523 else 1524 sub_temp = gen_reg_rtx (DImode); 1525 1526 if ((high_bits & 0xfffffc00) != 0) 1527 { 1528 emit_insn (gen_safe_HIGH64 (temp, high_bits)); 1529 if ((high_bits & ~0xfffffc00) != 0) 1530 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, 1531 sub_temp, 1532 gen_safe_OR64 (temp, (high_bits & 0x3ff)))); 1533 else 1534 sub_temp = temp; 1535 } 1536 else 1537 { 1538 emit_insn (gen_safe_SET64 (temp, high_bits)); 1539 sub_temp = temp; 1540 } 1541 1542 if (!reload_in_progress && !reload_completed) 1543 { 1544 rtx temp2 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode); 1545 rtx temp3 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode); 1546 rtx temp4 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode); 1547 1548 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, temp4, 1549 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, sub_temp, 1550 GEN_INT (32)))); 1551 1552 emit_insn (gen_safe_HIGH64 (temp2, low_bits)); 1553 if ((low_bits & ~0xfffffc00) != 0) 1554 { 1555 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, temp3, 1556 gen_safe_OR64 (temp2, (low_bits & 0x3ff)))); 1557 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0, 1558 gen_rtx_PLUS (DImode, temp4, temp3))); 1559 } 1560 else 1561 { 1562 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0, 1563 gen_rtx_PLUS (DImode, temp4, temp2))); 1564 } 1565 } 1566 else 1567 { 1568 rtx low1 = GEN_INT ((low_bits >> (32 - 12)) & 0xfff); 1569 rtx low2 = GEN_INT ((low_bits >> (32 - 12 - 12)) & 0xfff); 1570 rtx low3 = GEN_INT ((low_bits >> (32 - 12 - 12 - 8)) & 0x0ff); 1571 int to_shift = 12; 1572 1573 /* We are in the middle of reload, so this is really 1574 painful. However we do still make an attempt to 1575 avoid emitting truly stupid code. */ 1576 if (low1 != const0_rtx) 1577 { 1578 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0, 1579 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, sub_temp, 1580 GEN_INT (to_shift)))); 1581 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0, 1582 gen_rtx_IOR (DImode, op0, low1))); 1583 sub_temp = op0; 1584 to_shift = 12; 1585 } 1586 else 1587 { 1588 to_shift += 12; 1589 } 1590 if (low2 != const0_rtx) 1591 { 1592 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0, 1593 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, sub_temp, 1594 GEN_INT (to_shift)))); 1595 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0, 1596 gen_rtx_IOR (DImode, op0, low2))); 1597 sub_temp = op0; 1598 to_shift = 8; 1599 } 1600 else 1601 { 1602 to_shift += 8; 1603 } 1604 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0, 1605 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, sub_temp, 1606 GEN_INT (to_shift)))); 1607 if (low3 != const0_rtx) 1608 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0, 1609 gen_rtx_IOR (DImode, op0, low3))); 1610 /* phew... */ 1611 } 1612} 1613 1614/* Analyze a 64-bit constant for certain properties. */ 1615static void analyze_64bit_constant (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, 1616 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, 1617 int *, int *, int *); 1618 1619static void 1620analyze_64bit_constant (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT high_bits, 1621 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT low_bits, 1622 int *hbsp, int *lbsp, int *abbasp) 1623{ 1624 int lowest_bit_set, highest_bit_set, all_bits_between_are_set; 1625 int i; 1626 1627 lowest_bit_set = highest_bit_set = -1; 1628 i = 0; 1629 do 1630 { 1631 if ((lowest_bit_set == -1) 1632 && ((low_bits >> i) & 1)) 1633 lowest_bit_set = i; 1634 if ((highest_bit_set == -1) 1635 && ((high_bits >> (32 - i - 1)) & 1)) 1636 highest_bit_set = (64 - i - 1); 1637 } 1638 while (++i < 32 1639 && ((highest_bit_set == -1) 1640 || (lowest_bit_set == -1))); 1641 if (i == 32) 1642 { 1643 i = 0; 1644 do 1645 { 1646 if ((lowest_bit_set == -1) 1647 && ((high_bits >> i) & 1)) 1648 lowest_bit_set = i + 32; 1649 if ((highest_bit_set == -1) 1650 && ((low_bits >> (32 - i - 1)) & 1)) 1651 highest_bit_set = 32 - i - 1; 1652 } 1653 while (++i < 32 1654 && ((highest_bit_set == -1) 1655 || (lowest_bit_set == -1))); 1656 } 1657 /* If there are no bits set this should have gone out 1658 as one instruction! */ 1659 gcc_assert (lowest_bit_set != -1 && highest_bit_set != -1); 1660 all_bits_between_are_set = 1; 1661 for (i = lowest_bit_set; i <= highest_bit_set; i++) 1662 { 1663 if (i < 32) 1664 { 1665 if ((low_bits & (1 << i)) != 0) 1666 continue; 1667 } 1668 else 1669 { 1670 if ((high_bits & (1 << (i - 32))) != 0) 1671 continue; 1672 } 1673 all_bits_between_are_set = 0; 1674 break; 1675 } 1676 *hbsp = highest_bit_set; 1677 *lbsp = lowest_bit_set; 1678 *abbasp = all_bits_between_are_set; 1679} 1680 1681static int const64_is_2insns (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT); 1682 1683static int 1684const64_is_2insns (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT high_bits, 1685 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT low_bits) 1686{ 1687 int highest_bit_set, lowest_bit_set, all_bits_between_are_set; 1688 1689 if (high_bits == 0 1690 || high_bits == 0xffffffff) 1691 return 1; 1692 1693 analyze_64bit_constant (high_bits, low_bits, 1694 &highest_bit_set, &lowest_bit_set, 1695 &all_bits_between_are_set); 1696 1697 if ((highest_bit_set == 63 1698 || lowest_bit_set == 0) 1699 && all_bits_between_are_set != 0) 1700 return 1; 1701 1702 if ((highest_bit_set - lowest_bit_set) < 21) 1703 return 1; 1704 1705 return 0; 1706} 1707 1708static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT create_simple_focus_bits (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, 1709 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, 1710 int, int); 1711 1712static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT 1713create_simple_focus_bits (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT high_bits, 1714 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT low_bits, 1715 int lowest_bit_set, int shift) 1716{ 1717 HOST_WIDE_INT hi, lo; 1718 1719 if (lowest_bit_set < 32) 1720 { 1721 lo = (low_bits >> lowest_bit_set) << shift; 1722 hi = ((high_bits << (32 - lowest_bit_set)) << shift); 1723 } 1724 else 1725 { 1726 lo = 0; 1727 hi = ((high_bits >> (lowest_bit_set - 32)) << shift); 1728 } 1729 gcc_assert (! (hi & lo)); 1730 return (hi | lo); 1731} 1732 1733/* Here we are sure to be arch64 and this is an integer constant 1734 being loaded into a register. Emit the most efficient 1735 insn sequence possible. Detection of all the 1-insn cases 1736 has been done already. */ 1737void 1738sparc_emit_set_const64 (rtx op0, rtx op1) 1739{ 1740 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT high_bits, low_bits; 1741 int lowest_bit_set, highest_bit_set; 1742 int all_bits_between_are_set; 1743 rtx temp = 0; 1744 1745 /* Sanity check that we know what we are working with. */ 1746 gcc_assert (TARGET_ARCH64 1747 && (GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG 1748 || (REG_P (op0) && ! SPARC_FP_REG_P (REGNO (op0))))); 1749 1750 if (reload_in_progress || reload_completed) 1751 temp = op0; 1752 1753 if (GET_CODE (op1) != CONST_INT) 1754 { 1755 sparc_emit_set_symbolic_const64 (op0, op1, temp); 1756 return; 1757 } 1758 1759 if (! temp) 1760 temp = gen_reg_rtx (DImode); 1761 1762 high_bits = ((INTVAL (op1) >> 32) & 0xffffffff); 1763 low_bits = (INTVAL (op1) & 0xffffffff); 1764 1765 /* low_bits bits 0 --> 31 1766 high_bits bits 32 --> 63 */ 1767 1768 analyze_64bit_constant (high_bits, low_bits, 1769 &highest_bit_set, &lowest_bit_set, 1770 &all_bits_between_are_set); 1771 1772 /* First try for a 2-insn sequence. */ 1773 1774 /* These situations are preferred because the optimizer can 1775 * do more things with them: 1776 * 1) mov -1, %reg 1777 * sllx %reg, shift, %reg 1778 * 2) mov -1, %reg 1779 * srlx %reg, shift, %reg 1780 * 3) mov some_small_const, %reg 1781 * sllx %reg, shift, %reg 1782 */ 1783 if (((highest_bit_set == 63 1784 || lowest_bit_set == 0) 1785 && all_bits_between_are_set != 0) 1786 || ((highest_bit_set - lowest_bit_set) < 12)) 1787 { 1788 HOST_WIDE_INT the_const = -1; 1789 int shift = lowest_bit_set; 1790 1791 if ((highest_bit_set != 63 1792 && lowest_bit_set != 0) 1793 || all_bits_between_are_set == 0) 1794 { 1795 the_const = 1796 create_simple_focus_bits (high_bits, low_bits, 1797 lowest_bit_set, 0); 1798 } 1799 else if (lowest_bit_set == 0) 1800 shift = -(63 - highest_bit_set); 1801 1802 gcc_assert (SPARC_SIMM13_P (the_const)); 1803 gcc_assert (shift != 0); 1804 1805 emit_insn (gen_safe_SET64 (temp, the_const)); 1806 if (shift > 0) 1807 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, 1808 op0, 1809 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, 1810 temp, 1811 GEN_INT (shift)))); 1812 else if (shift < 0) 1813 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, 1814 op0, 1815 gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT (DImode, 1816 temp, 1817 GEN_INT (-shift)))); 1818 return; 1819 } 1820 1821 /* Now a range of 22 or less bits set somewhere. 1822 * 1) sethi %hi(focus_bits), %reg 1823 * sllx %reg, shift, %reg 1824 * 2) sethi %hi(focus_bits), %reg 1825 * srlx %reg, shift, %reg 1826 */ 1827 if ((highest_bit_set - lowest_bit_set) < 21) 1828 { 1829 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT focus_bits = 1830 create_simple_focus_bits (high_bits, low_bits, 1831 lowest_bit_set, 10); 1832 1833 gcc_assert (SPARC_SETHI_P (focus_bits)); 1834 gcc_assert (lowest_bit_set != 10); 1835 1836 emit_insn (gen_safe_HIGH64 (temp, focus_bits)); 1837 1838 /* If lowest_bit_set == 10 then a sethi alone could have done it. */ 1839 if (lowest_bit_set < 10) 1840 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, 1841 op0, 1842 gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT (DImode, temp, 1843 GEN_INT (10 - lowest_bit_set)))); 1844 else if (lowest_bit_set > 10) 1845 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, 1846 op0, 1847 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, temp, 1848 GEN_INT (lowest_bit_set - 10)))); 1849 return; 1850 } 1851 1852 /* 1) sethi %hi(low_bits), %reg 1853 * or %reg, %lo(low_bits), %reg 1854 * 2) sethi %hi(~low_bits), %reg 1855 * xor %reg, %lo(-0x400 | (low_bits & 0x3ff)), %reg 1856 */ 1857 if (high_bits == 0 1858 || high_bits == 0xffffffff) 1859 { 1860 sparc_emit_set_const64_quick1 (op0, temp, low_bits, 1861 (high_bits == 0xffffffff)); 1862 return; 1863 } 1864 1865 /* Now, try 3-insn sequences. */ 1866 1867 /* 1) sethi %hi(high_bits), %reg 1868 * or %reg, %lo(high_bits), %reg 1869 * sllx %reg, 32, %reg 1870 */ 1871 if (low_bits == 0) 1872 { 1873 sparc_emit_set_const64_quick2 (op0, temp, high_bits, 0, 32); 1874 return; 1875 } 1876 1877 /* We may be able to do something quick 1878 when the constant is negated, so try that. */ 1879 if (const64_is_2insns ((~high_bits) & 0xffffffff, 1880 (~low_bits) & 0xfffffc00)) 1881 { 1882 /* NOTE: The trailing bits get XOR'd so we need the 1883 non-negated bits, not the negated ones. */ 1884 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT trailing_bits = low_bits & 0x3ff; 1885 1886 if ((((~high_bits) & 0xffffffff) == 0 1887 && ((~low_bits) & 0x80000000) == 0) 1888 || (((~high_bits) & 0xffffffff) == 0xffffffff 1889 && ((~low_bits) & 0x80000000) != 0)) 1890 { 1891 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT fast_int = (~low_bits & 0xffffffff); 1892 1893 if ((SPARC_SETHI_P (fast_int) 1894 && (~high_bits & 0xffffffff) == 0) 1895 || SPARC_SIMM13_P (fast_int)) 1896 emit_insn (gen_safe_SET64 (temp, fast_int)); 1897 else 1898 sparc_emit_set_const64 (temp, GEN_INT (fast_int)); 1899 } 1900 else 1901 { 1902 rtx negated_const; 1903 negated_const = GEN_INT (((~low_bits) & 0xfffffc00) | 1904 (((HOST_WIDE_INT)((~high_bits) & 0xffffffff))<<32)); 1905 sparc_emit_set_const64 (temp, negated_const); 1906 } 1907 1908 /* If we are XOR'ing with -1, then we should emit a one's complement 1909 instead. This way the combiner will notice logical operations 1910 such as ANDN later on and substitute. */ 1911 if (trailing_bits == 0x3ff) 1912 { 1913 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0, 1914 gen_rtx_NOT (DImode, temp))); 1915 } 1916 else 1917 { 1918 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, 1919 op0, 1920 gen_safe_XOR64 (temp, 1921 (-0x400 | trailing_bits)))); 1922 } 1923 return; 1924 } 1925 1926 /* 1) sethi %hi(xxx), %reg 1927 * or %reg, %lo(xxx), %reg 1928 * sllx %reg, yyy, %reg 1929 * 1930 * ??? This is just a generalized version of the low_bits==0 1931 * thing above, FIXME... 1932 */ 1933 if ((highest_bit_set - lowest_bit_set) < 32) 1934 { 1935 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT focus_bits = 1936 create_simple_focus_bits (high_bits, low_bits, 1937 lowest_bit_set, 0); 1938 1939 /* We can't get here in this state. */ 1940 gcc_assert (highest_bit_set >= 32 && lowest_bit_set < 32); 1941 1942 /* So what we know is that the set bits straddle the 1943 middle of the 64-bit word. */ 1944 sparc_emit_set_const64_quick2 (op0, temp, 1945 focus_bits, 0, 1946 lowest_bit_set); 1947 return; 1948 } 1949 1950 /* 1) sethi %hi(high_bits), %reg 1951 * or %reg, %lo(high_bits), %reg 1952 * sllx %reg, 32, %reg 1953 * or %reg, low_bits, %reg 1954 */ 1955 if (SPARC_SIMM13_P(low_bits) 1956 && ((int)low_bits > 0)) 1957 { 1958 sparc_emit_set_const64_quick2 (op0, temp, high_bits, low_bits, 32); 1959 return; 1960 } 1961 1962 /* The easiest way when all else fails, is full decomposition. */ 1963#if 0 1964 printf ("sparc_emit_set_const64: Hard constant [%08lx%08lx] neg[%08lx%08lx]\n", 1965 high_bits, low_bits, ~high_bits, ~low_bits); 1966#endif 1967 sparc_emit_set_const64_longway (op0, temp, high_bits, low_bits); 1968} 1969#endif /* HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT == 32 */ 1970 1971/* Given a comparison code (EQ, NE, etc.) and the first operand of a COMPARE, 1972 return the mode to be used for the comparison. For floating-point, 1973 CCFP[E]mode is used. CC_NOOVmode should be used when the first operand 1974 is a PLUS, MINUS, NEG, or ASHIFT. CCmode should be used when no special 1975 processing is needed. */ 1976 1977enum machine_mode 1978select_cc_mode (enum rtx_code op, rtx x, rtx y ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED) 1979{ 1980 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) == MODE_FLOAT) 1981 { 1982 switch (op) 1983 { 1984 case EQ: 1985 case NE: 1986 case UNORDERED: 1987 case ORDERED: 1988 case UNLT: 1989 case UNLE: 1990 case UNGT: 1991 case UNGE: 1992 case UNEQ: 1993 case LTGT: 1994 return CCFPmode; 1995 1996 case LT: 1997 case LE: 1998 case GT: 1999 case GE: 2000 return CCFPEmode; 2001 2002 default: 2003 gcc_unreachable (); 2004 } 2005 } 2006 else if (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS || GET_CODE (x) == MINUS 2007 || GET_CODE (x) == NEG || GET_CODE (x) == ASHIFT) 2008 { 2009 if (TARGET_ARCH64 && GET_MODE (x) == DImode) 2010 return CCX_NOOVmode; 2011 else 2012 return CC_NOOVmode; 2013 } 2014 else 2015 { 2016 if (TARGET_ARCH64 && GET_MODE (x) == DImode) 2017 return CCXmode; 2018 else 2019 return CCmode; 2020 } 2021} 2022 2023/* Emit the compare insn and return the CC reg for a CODE comparison 2024 with operands X and Y. */ 2025 2026static rtx 2027gen_compare_reg_1 (enum rtx_code code, rtx x, rtx y) 2028{ 2029 enum machine_mode mode; 2030 rtx cc_reg; 2031 2032 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) == MODE_CC) 2033 return x; 2034 2035 mode = SELECT_CC_MODE (code, x, y); 2036 2037 /* ??? We don't have movcc patterns so we cannot generate pseudo regs for the 2038 fcc regs (cse can't tell they're really call clobbered regs and will 2039 remove a duplicate comparison even if there is an intervening function 2040 call - it will then try to reload the cc reg via an int reg which is why 2041 we need the movcc patterns). It is possible to provide the movcc 2042 patterns by using the ldxfsr/stxfsr v9 insns. I tried it: you need two 2043 registers (say %g1,%g5) and it takes about 6 insns. A better fix would be 2044 to tell cse that CCFPE mode registers (even pseudos) are call 2045 clobbered. */ 2046 2047 /* ??? This is an experiment. Rather than making changes to cse which may 2048 or may not be easy/clean, we do our own cse. This is possible because 2049 we will generate hard registers. Cse knows they're call clobbered (it 2050 doesn't know the same thing about pseudos). If we guess wrong, no big 2051 deal, but if we win, great! */ 2052 2053 if (TARGET_V9 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) == MODE_FLOAT) 2054#if 1 /* experiment */ 2055 { 2056 int reg; 2057 /* We cycle through the registers to ensure they're all exercised. */ 2058 static int next_fcc_reg = 0; 2059 /* Previous x,y for each fcc reg. */ 2060 static rtx prev_args[4][2]; 2061 2062 /* Scan prev_args for x,y. */ 2063 for (reg = 0; reg < 4; reg++) 2064 if (prev_args[reg][0] == x && prev_args[reg][1] == y) 2065 break; 2066 if (reg == 4) 2067 { 2068 reg = next_fcc_reg; 2069 prev_args[reg][0] = x; 2070 prev_args[reg][1] = y; 2071 next_fcc_reg = (next_fcc_reg + 1) & 3; 2072 } 2073 cc_reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, reg + SPARC_FIRST_V9_FCC_REG); 2074 } 2075#else 2076 cc_reg = gen_reg_rtx (mode); 2077#endif /* ! experiment */ 2078 else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) == MODE_FLOAT) 2079 cc_reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, SPARC_FCC_REG); 2080 else 2081 cc_reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, SPARC_ICC_REG); 2082 2083 /* We shouldn't get there for TFmode if !TARGET_HARD_QUAD. If we do, this 2084 will only result in an unrecognizable insn so no point in asserting. */ 2085 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, cc_reg, gen_rtx_COMPARE (mode, x, y))); 2086 2087 return cc_reg; 2088} 2089 2090 2091/* Emit the compare insn and return the CC reg for the comparison in CMP. */ 2092 2093rtx 2094gen_compare_reg (rtx cmp) 2095{ 2096 return gen_compare_reg_1 (GET_CODE (cmp), XEXP (cmp, 0), XEXP (cmp, 1)); 2097} 2098 2099/* This function is used for v9 only. 2100 DEST is the target of the Scc insn. 2101 CODE is the code for an Scc's comparison. 2102 X and Y are the values we compare. 2103 2104 This function is needed to turn 2105 2106 (set (reg:SI 110) 2107 (gt (reg:CCX 100 %icc) 2108 (const_int 0))) 2109 into 2110 (set (reg:SI 110) 2111 (gt:DI (reg:CCX 100 %icc) 2112 (const_int 0))) 2113 2114 IE: The instruction recognizer needs to see the mode of the comparison to 2115 find the right instruction. We could use "gt:DI" right in the 2116 define_expand, but leaving it out allows us to handle DI, SI, etc. */ 2117 2118static int 2119gen_v9_scc (rtx dest, enum rtx_code compare_code, rtx x, rtx y) 2120{ 2121 if (! TARGET_ARCH64 2122 && (GET_MODE (x) == DImode 2123 || GET_MODE (dest) == DImode)) 2124 return 0; 2125 2126 /* Try to use the movrCC insns. */ 2127 if (TARGET_ARCH64 2128 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) == MODE_INT 2129 && y == const0_rtx 2130 && v9_regcmp_p (compare_code)) 2131 { 2132 rtx op0 = x; 2133 rtx temp; 2134 2135 /* Special case for op0 != 0. This can be done with one instruction if 2136 dest == x. */ 2137 2138 if (compare_code == NE 2139 && GET_MODE (dest) == DImode 2140 && rtx_equal_p (op0, dest)) 2141 { 2142 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, dest, 2143 gen_rtx_IF_THEN_ELSE (DImode, 2144 gen_rtx_fmt_ee (compare_code, DImode, 2145 op0, const0_rtx), 2146 const1_rtx, 2147 dest))); 2148 return 1; 2149 } 2150 2151 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (dest, op0)) 2152 { 2153 /* Handle the case where dest == x. 2154 We "early clobber" the result. */ 2155 op0 = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (x)); 2156 emit_move_insn (op0, x); 2157 } 2158 2159 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, dest, const0_rtx)); 2160 if (GET_MODE (op0) != DImode) 2161 { 2162 temp = gen_reg_rtx (DImode); 2163 convert_move (temp, op0, 0); 2164 } 2165 else 2166 temp = op0; 2167 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, dest, 2168 gen_rtx_IF_THEN_ELSE (GET_MODE (dest), 2169 gen_rtx_fmt_ee (compare_code, DImode, 2170 temp, const0_rtx), 2171 const1_rtx, 2172 dest))); 2173 return 1; 2174 } 2175 else 2176 { 2177 x = gen_compare_reg_1 (compare_code, x, y); 2178 y = const0_rtx; 2179 2180 gcc_assert (GET_MODE (x) != CC_NOOVmode 2181 && GET_MODE (x) != CCX_NOOVmode); 2182 2183 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, dest, const0_rtx)); 2184 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, dest, 2185 gen_rtx_IF_THEN_ELSE (GET_MODE (dest), 2186 gen_rtx_fmt_ee (compare_code, 2187 GET_MODE (x), x, y), 2188 const1_rtx, dest))); 2189 return 1; 2190 } 2191} 2192 2193 2194/* Emit an scc insn. For seq, sne, sgeu, and sltu, we can do this 2195 without jumps using the addx/subx instructions. */ 2196 2197bool 2198emit_scc_insn (rtx operands[]) 2199{ 2200 rtx tem; 2201 rtx x; 2202 rtx y; 2203 enum rtx_code code; 2204 2205 /* The quad-word fp compare library routines all return nonzero to indicate 2206 true, which is different from the equivalent libgcc routines, so we must 2207 handle them specially here. */ 2208 if (GET_MODE (operands[2]) == TFmode && ! TARGET_HARD_QUAD) 2209 { 2210 operands[1] = sparc_emit_float_lib_cmp (operands[2], operands[3], 2211 GET_CODE (operands[1])); 2212 operands[2] = XEXP (operands[1], 0); 2213 operands[3] = XEXP (operands[1], 1); 2214 } 2215 2216 code = GET_CODE (operands[1]); 2217 x = operands[2]; 2218 y = operands[3]; 2219 2220 /* For seq/sne on v9 we use the same code as v8 (the addx/subx method has 2221 more applications). The exception to this is "reg != 0" which can 2222 be done in one instruction on v9 (so we do it). */ 2223 if (code == EQ) 2224 { 2225 if (GET_MODE (x) == SImode) 2226 { 2227 rtx pat = gen_seqsi_special (operands[0], x, y); 2228 emit_insn (pat); 2229 return true; 2230 } 2231 else if (GET_MODE (x) == DImode) 2232 { 2233 rtx pat = gen_seqdi_special (operands[0], x, y); 2234 emit_insn (pat); 2235 return true; 2236 } 2237 } 2238 2239 if (code == NE) 2240 { 2241 if (GET_MODE (x) == SImode) 2242 { 2243 rtx pat = gen_snesi_special (operands[0], x, y); 2244 emit_insn (pat); 2245 return true; 2246 } 2247 else if (GET_MODE (x) == DImode) 2248 { 2249 rtx pat = gen_snedi_special (operands[0], x, y); 2250 emit_insn (pat); 2251 return true; 2252 } 2253 } 2254 2255 /* For the rest, on v9 we can use conditional moves. */ 2256 2257 if (TARGET_V9) 2258 { 2259 if (gen_v9_scc (operands[0], code, x, y)) 2260 return true; 2261 } 2262 2263 /* We can do LTU and GEU using the addx/subx instructions too. And 2264 for GTU/LEU, if both operands are registers swap them and fall 2265 back to the easy case. */ 2266 if (code == GTU || code == LEU) 2267 { 2268 if ((GET_CODE (x) == REG || GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG) 2269 && (GET_CODE (y) == REG || GET_CODE (y) == SUBREG)) 2270 { 2271 tem = x; 2272 x = y; 2273 y = tem; 2274 code = swap_condition (code); 2275 } 2276 } 2277 2278 if (code == LTU || code == GEU) 2279 { 2280 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, operands[0], 2281 gen_rtx_fmt_ee (code, SImode, 2282 gen_compare_reg_1 (code, x, y), 2283 const0_rtx))); 2284 return true; 2285 } 2286 2287 /* Nope, do branches. */ 2288 return false; 2289} 2290 2291/* Emit a conditional jump insn for the v9 architecture using comparison code 2292 CODE and jump target LABEL. 2293 This function exists to take advantage of the v9 brxx insns. */ 2294 2295static void 2296emit_v9_brxx_insn (enum rtx_code code, rtx op0, rtx label) 2297{ 2298 emit_jump_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, 2299 pc_rtx, 2300 gen_rtx_IF_THEN_ELSE (VOIDmode, 2301 gen_rtx_fmt_ee (code, GET_MODE (op0), 2302 op0, const0_rtx), 2303 gen_rtx_LABEL_REF (VOIDmode, label), 2304 pc_rtx))); 2305} 2306 2307void 2308emit_conditional_branch_insn (rtx operands[]) 2309{ 2310 /* The quad-word fp compare library routines all return nonzero to indicate 2311 true, which is different from the equivalent libgcc routines, so we must 2312 handle them specially here. */ 2313 if (GET_MODE (operands[1]) == TFmode && ! TARGET_HARD_QUAD) 2314 { 2315 operands[0] = sparc_emit_float_lib_cmp (operands[1], operands[2], 2316 GET_CODE (operands[0])); 2317 operands[1] = XEXP (operands[0], 0); 2318 operands[2] = XEXP (operands[0], 1); 2319 } 2320 2321 if (TARGET_ARCH64 && operands[2] == const0_rtx 2322 && GET_CODE (operands[1]) == REG 2323 && GET_MODE (operands[1]) == DImode) 2324 { 2325 emit_v9_brxx_insn (GET_CODE (operands[0]), operands[1], operands[3]); 2326 return; 2327 } 2328 2329 operands[1] = gen_compare_reg (operands[0]); 2330 operands[2] = const0_rtx; 2331 operands[0] = gen_rtx_fmt_ee (GET_CODE (operands[0]), VOIDmode, 2332 operands[1], operands[2]); 2333 emit_jump_insn (gen_cbranchcc4 (operands[0], operands[1], operands[2], 2334 operands[3])); 2335} 2336 2337 2338/* Generate a DFmode part of a hard TFmode register. 2339 REG is the TFmode hard register, LOW is 1 for the 2340 low 64bit of the register and 0 otherwise. 2341 */ 2342rtx 2343gen_df_reg (rtx reg, int low) 2344{ 2345 int regno = REGNO (reg); 2346 2347 if ((WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN == 0) ^ (low != 0)) 2348 regno += (TARGET_ARCH64 && regno < 32) ? 1 : 2; 2349 return gen_rtx_REG (DFmode, regno); 2350} 2351 2352/* Generate a call to FUNC with OPERANDS. Operand 0 is the return value. 2353 Unlike normal calls, TFmode operands are passed by reference. It is 2354 assumed that no more than 3 operands are required. */ 2355 2356static void 2357emit_soft_tfmode_libcall (const char *func_name, int nargs, rtx *operands) 2358{ 2359 rtx ret_slot = NULL, arg[3], func_sym; 2360 int i; 2361 2362 /* We only expect to be called for conversions, unary, and binary ops. */ 2363 gcc_assert (nargs == 2 || nargs == 3); 2364 2365 for (i = 0; i < nargs; ++i) 2366 { 2367 rtx this_arg = operands[i]; 2368 rtx this_slot; 2369 2370 /* TFmode arguments and return values are passed by reference. */ 2371 if (GET_MODE (this_arg) == TFmode) 2372 { 2373 int force_stack_temp; 2374 2375 force_stack_temp = 0; 2376 if (TARGET_BUGGY_QP_LIB && i == 0) 2377 force_stack_temp = 1; 2378 2379 if (GET_CODE (this_arg) == MEM 2380 && ! force_stack_temp) 2381 this_arg = XEXP (this_arg, 0); 2382 else if (CONSTANT_P (this_arg) 2383 && ! force_stack_temp) 2384 { 2385 this_slot = force_const_mem (TFmode, this_arg); 2386 this_arg = XEXP (this_slot, 0); 2387 } 2388 else 2389 { 2390 this_slot = assign_stack_temp (TFmode, GET_MODE_SIZE (TFmode), 0); 2391 2392 /* Operand 0 is the return value. We'll copy it out later. */ 2393 if (i > 0) 2394 emit_move_insn (this_slot, this_arg); 2395 else 2396 ret_slot = this_slot; 2397 2398 this_arg = XEXP (this_slot, 0); 2399 } 2400 } 2401 2402 arg[i] = this_arg; 2403 } 2404 2405 func_sym = gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, func_name); 2406 2407 if (GET_MODE (operands[0]) == TFmode) 2408 { 2409 if (nargs == 2) 2410 emit_library_call (func_sym, LCT_NORMAL, VOIDmode, 2, 2411 arg[0], GET_MODE (arg[0]), 2412 arg[1], GET_MODE (arg[1])); 2413 else 2414 emit_library_call (func_sym, LCT_NORMAL, VOIDmode, 3, 2415 arg[0], GET_MODE (arg[0]), 2416 arg[1], GET_MODE (arg[1]), 2417 arg[2], GET_MODE (arg[2])); 2418 2419 if (ret_slot) 2420 emit_move_insn (operands[0], ret_slot); 2421 } 2422 else 2423 { 2424 rtx ret; 2425 2426 gcc_assert (nargs == 2); 2427 2428 ret = emit_library_call_value (func_sym, operands[0], LCT_NORMAL, 2429 GET_MODE (operands[0]), 1, 2430 arg[1], GET_MODE (arg[1])); 2431 2432 if (ret != operands[0]) 2433 emit_move_insn (operands[0], ret); 2434 } 2435} 2436 2437/* Expand soft-float TFmode calls to sparc abi routines. */ 2438 2439static void 2440emit_soft_tfmode_binop (enum rtx_code code, rtx *operands) 2441{ 2442 const char *func; 2443 2444 switch (code) 2445 { 2446 case PLUS: 2447 func = "_Qp_add"; 2448 break; 2449 case MINUS: 2450 func = "_Qp_sub"; 2451 break; 2452 case MULT: 2453 func = "_Qp_mul"; 2454 break; 2455 case DIV: 2456 func = "_Qp_div"; 2457 break; 2458 default: 2459 gcc_unreachable (); 2460 } 2461 2462 emit_soft_tfmode_libcall (func, 3, operands); 2463} 2464 2465static void 2466emit_soft_tfmode_unop (enum rtx_code code, rtx *operands) 2467{ 2468 const char *func; 2469 2470 gcc_assert (code == SQRT); 2471 func = "_Qp_sqrt"; 2472 2473 emit_soft_tfmode_libcall (func, 2, operands); 2474} 2475 2476static void 2477emit_soft_tfmode_cvt (enum rtx_code code, rtx *operands) 2478{ 2479 const char *func; 2480 2481 switch (code) 2482 { 2483 case FLOAT_EXTEND: 2484 switch (GET_MODE (operands[1])) 2485 { 2486 case SFmode: 2487 func = "_Qp_stoq"; 2488 break; 2489 case DFmode: 2490 func = "_Qp_dtoq"; 2491 break; 2492 default: 2493 gcc_unreachable (); 2494 } 2495 break; 2496 2497 case FLOAT_TRUNCATE: 2498 switch (GET_MODE (operands[0])) 2499 { 2500 case SFmode: 2501 func = "_Qp_qtos"; 2502 break; 2503 case DFmode: 2504 func = "_Qp_qtod"; 2505 break; 2506 default: 2507 gcc_unreachable (); 2508 } 2509 break; 2510 2511 case FLOAT: 2512 switch (GET_MODE (operands[1])) 2513 { 2514 case SImode: 2515 func = "_Qp_itoq"; 2516 if (TARGET_ARCH64) 2517 operands[1] = gen_rtx_SIGN_EXTEND (DImode, operands[1]); 2518 break; 2519 case DImode: 2520 func = "_Qp_xtoq"; 2521 break; 2522 default: 2523 gcc_unreachable (); 2524 } 2525 break; 2526 2527 case UNSIGNED_FLOAT: 2528 switch (GET_MODE (operands[1])) 2529 { 2530 case SImode: 2531 func = "_Qp_uitoq"; 2532 if (TARGET_ARCH64) 2533 operands[1] = gen_rtx_ZERO_EXTEND (DImode, operands[1]); 2534 break; 2535 case DImode: 2536 func = "_Qp_uxtoq"; 2537 break; 2538 default: 2539 gcc_unreachable (); 2540 } 2541 break; 2542 2543 case FIX: 2544 switch (GET_MODE (operands[0])) 2545 { 2546 case SImode: 2547 func = "_Qp_qtoi"; 2548 break; 2549 case DImode: 2550 func = "_Qp_qtox"; 2551 break; 2552 default: 2553 gcc_unreachable (); 2554 } 2555 break; 2556 2557 case UNSIGNED_FIX: 2558 switch (GET_MODE (operands[0])) 2559 { 2560 case SImode: 2561 func = "_Qp_qtoui"; 2562 break; 2563 case DImode: 2564 func = "_Qp_qtoux"; 2565 break; 2566 default: 2567 gcc_unreachable (); 2568 } 2569 break; 2570 2571 default: 2572 gcc_unreachable (); 2573 } 2574 2575 emit_soft_tfmode_libcall (func, 2, operands); 2576} 2577 2578/* Expand a hard-float tfmode operation. All arguments must be in 2579 registers. */ 2580 2581static void 2582emit_hard_tfmode_operation (enum rtx_code code, rtx *operands) 2583{ 2584 rtx op, dest; 2585 2586 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == RTX_UNARY) 2587 { 2588 operands[1] = force_reg (GET_MODE (operands[1]), operands[1]); 2589 op = gen_rtx_fmt_e (code, GET_MODE (operands[0]), operands[1]); 2590 } 2591 else 2592 { 2593 operands[1] = force_reg (GET_MODE (operands[1]), operands[1]); 2594 operands[2] = force_reg (GET_MODE (operands[2]), operands[2]); 2595 op = gen_rtx_fmt_ee (code, GET_MODE (operands[0]), 2596 operands[1], operands[2]); 2597 } 2598 2599 if (register_operand (operands[0], VOIDmode)) 2600 dest = operands[0]; 2601 else 2602 dest = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (operands[0])); 2603 2604 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, dest, op)); 2605 2606 if (dest != operands[0]) 2607 emit_move_insn (operands[0], dest); 2608} 2609 2610void 2611emit_tfmode_binop (enum rtx_code code, rtx *operands) 2612{ 2613 if (TARGET_HARD_QUAD) 2614 emit_hard_tfmode_operation (code, operands); 2615 else 2616 emit_soft_tfmode_binop (code, operands); 2617} 2618 2619void 2620emit_tfmode_unop (enum rtx_code code, rtx *operands) 2621{ 2622 if (TARGET_HARD_QUAD) 2623 emit_hard_tfmode_operation (code, operands); 2624 else 2625 emit_soft_tfmode_unop (code, operands); 2626} 2627 2628void 2629emit_tfmode_cvt (enum rtx_code code, rtx *operands) 2630{ 2631 if (TARGET_HARD_QUAD) 2632 emit_hard_tfmode_operation (code, operands); 2633 else 2634 emit_soft_tfmode_cvt (code, operands); 2635} 2636 2637/* Return nonzero if a branch/jump/call instruction will be emitting 2638 nop into its delay slot. */ 2639 2640int 2641empty_delay_slot (rtx insn) 2642{ 2643 rtx seq; 2644 2645 /* If no previous instruction (should not happen), return true. */ 2646 if (PREV_INSN (insn) == NULL) 2647 return 1; 2648 2649 seq = NEXT_INSN (PREV_INSN (insn)); 2650 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (seq)) == SEQUENCE) 2651 return 0; 2652 2653 return 1; 2654} 2655 2656/* Return nonzero if TRIAL can go into the call delay slot. */ 2657 2658int 2659tls_call_delay (rtx trial) 2660{ 2661 rtx pat; 2662 2663 /* Binutils allows 2664 call __tls_get_addr, %tgd_call (foo) 2665 add %l7, %o0, %o0, %tgd_add (foo) 2666 while Sun as/ld does not. */ 2667 if (TARGET_GNU_TLS || !TARGET_TLS) 2668 return 1; 2669 2670 pat = PATTERN (trial); 2671 2672 /* We must reject tgd_add{32|64}, i.e. 2673 (set (reg) (plus (reg) (unspec [(reg) (symbol_ref)] UNSPEC_TLSGD))) 2674 and tldm_add{32|64}, i.e. 2675 (set (reg) (plus (reg) (unspec [(reg) (symbol_ref)] UNSPEC_TLSLDM))) 2676 for Sun as/ld. */ 2677 if (GET_CODE (pat) == SET 2678 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (pat)) == PLUS) 2679 { 2680 rtx unspec = XEXP (SET_SRC (pat), 1); 2681 2682 if (GET_CODE (unspec) == UNSPEC 2683 && (XINT (unspec, 1) == UNSPEC_TLSGD 2684 || XINT (unspec, 1) == UNSPEC_TLSLDM)) 2685 return 0; 2686 } 2687 2688 return 1; 2689} 2690 2691/* Return nonzero if TRIAL, an insn, can be combined with a 'restore' 2692 instruction. RETURN_P is true if the v9 variant 'return' is to be 2693 considered in the test too. 2694 2695 TRIAL must be a SET whose destination is a REG appropriate for the 2696 'restore' instruction or, if RETURN_P is true, for the 'return' 2697 instruction. */ 2698 2699static int 2700eligible_for_restore_insn (rtx trial, bool return_p) 2701{ 2702 rtx pat = PATTERN (trial); 2703 rtx src = SET_SRC (pat); 2704 2705 /* The 'restore src,%g0,dest' pattern for word mode and below. */ 2706 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (src)) != MODE_FLOAT 2707 && arith_operand (src, GET_MODE (src))) 2708 { 2709 if (TARGET_ARCH64) 2710 return GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src)) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (DImode); 2711 else 2712 return GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src)) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (SImode); 2713 } 2714 2715 /* The 'restore src,%g0,dest' pattern for double-word mode. */ 2716 else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (src)) != MODE_FLOAT 2717 && arith_double_operand (src, GET_MODE (src))) 2718 return GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src)) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (DImode); 2719 2720 /* The 'restore src,%g0,dest' pattern for float if no FPU. */ 2721 else if (! TARGET_FPU && register_operand (src, SFmode)) 2722 return 1; 2723 2724 /* The 'restore src,%g0,dest' pattern for double if no FPU. */ 2725 else if (! TARGET_FPU && TARGET_ARCH64 && register_operand (src, DFmode)) 2726 return 1; 2727 2728 /* If we have the 'return' instruction, anything that does not use 2729 local or output registers and can go into a delay slot wins. */ 2730 else if (return_p && TARGET_V9 && ! epilogue_renumber (&pat, 1) 2731 && (get_attr_in_uncond_branch_delay (trial) 2732 == IN_UNCOND_BRANCH_DELAY_TRUE)) 2733 return 1; 2734 2735 /* The 'restore src1,src2,dest' pattern for SImode. */ 2736 else if (GET_CODE (src) == PLUS 2737 && register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), SImode) 2738 && arith_operand (XEXP (src, 1), SImode)) 2739 return 1; 2740 2741 /* The 'restore src1,src2,dest' pattern for DImode. */ 2742 else if (GET_CODE (src) == PLUS 2743 && register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), DImode) 2744 && arith_double_operand (XEXP (src, 1), DImode)) 2745 return 1; 2746 2747 /* The 'restore src1,%lo(src2),dest' pattern. */ 2748 else if (GET_CODE (src) == LO_SUM 2749 && ! TARGET_CM_MEDMID 2750 && ((register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), SImode) 2751 && immediate_operand (XEXP (src, 1), SImode)) 2752 || (TARGET_ARCH64 2753 && register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), DImode) 2754 && immediate_operand (XEXP (src, 1), DImode)))) 2755 return 1; 2756 2757 /* The 'restore src,src,dest' pattern. */ 2758 else if (GET_CODE (src) == ASHIFT 2759 && (register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), SImode) 2760 || register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), DImode)) 2761 && XEXP (src, 1) == const1_rtx) 2762 return 1; 2763 2764 return 0; 2765} 2766 2767/* Return nonzero if TRIAL can go into the function return's 2768 delay slot. */ 2769 2770int 2771eligible_for_return_delay (rtx trial) 2772{ 2773 rtx pat; 2774 2775 if (GET_CODE (trial) != INSN || GET_CODE (PATTERN (trial)) != SET) 2776 return 0; 2777 2778 if (get_attr_length (trial) != 1) 2779 return 0; 2780 2781 /* If the function uses __builtin_eh_return, the eh_return machinery 2782 occupies the delay slot. */ 2783 if (crtl->calls_eh_return) 2784 return 0; 2785 2786 /* In the case of a true leaf function, anything can go into the slot. */ 2787 if (sparc_leaf_function_p) 2788 return get_attr_in_uncond_branch_delay (trial) 2789 == IN_UNCOND_BRANCH_DELAY_TRUE; 2790 2791 pat = PATTERN (trial); 2792 2793 /* Otherwise, only operations which can be done in tandem with 2794 a `restore' or `return' insn can go into the delay slot. */ 2795 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (pat)) != REG 2796 || (REGNO (SET_DEST (pat)) >= 8 && REGNO (SET_DEST (pat)) < 24)) 2797 return 0; 2798 2799 /* If this instruction sets up floating point register and we have a return 2800 instruction, it can probably go in. But restore will not work 2801 with FP_REGS. */ 2802 if (REGNO (SET_DEST (pat)) >= 32) 2803 return (TARGET_V9 2804 && ! epilogue_renumber (&pat, 1) 2805 && (get_attr_in_uncond_branch_delay (trial) 2806 == IN_UNCOND_BRANCH_DELAY_TRUE)); 2807 2808 return eligible_for_restore_insn (trial, true); 2809} 2810 2811/* Return nonzero if TRIAL can go into the sibling call's 2812 delay slot. */ 2813 2814int 2815eligible_for_sibcall_delay (rtx trial) 2816{ 2817 rtx pat; 2818 2819 if (GET_CODE (trial) != INSN || GET_CODE (PATTERN (trial)) != SET) 2820 return 0; 2821 2822 if (get_attr_length (trial) != 1) 2823 return 0; 2824 2825 pat = PATTERN (trial); 2826 2827 if (sparc_leaf_function_p) 2828 { 2829 /* If the tail call is done using the call instruction, 2830 we have to restore %o7 in the delay slot. */ 2831 if (LEAF_SIBCALL_SLOT_RESERVED_P) 2832 return 0; 2833 2834 /* %g1 is used to build the function address */ 2835 if (reg_mentioned_p (gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 1), pat)) 2836 return 0; 2837 2838 return 1; 2839 } 2840 2841 /* Otherwise, only operations which can be done in tandem with 2842 a `restore' insn can go into the delay slot. */ 2843 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (pat)) != REG 2844 || (REGNO (SET_DEST (pat)) >= 8 && REGNO (SET_DEST (pat)) < 24) 2845 || REGNO (SET_DEST (pat)) >= 32) 2846 return 0; 2847 2848 /* If it mentions %o7, it can't go in, because sibcall will clobber it 2849 in most cases. */ 2850 if (reg_mentioned_p (gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 15), pat)) 2851 return 0; 2852 2853 return eligible_for_restore_insn (trial, false); 2854} 2855 2856int 2857short_branch (int uid1, int uid2) 2858{ 2859 int delta = INSN_ADDRESSES (uid1) - INSN_ADDRESSES (uid2); 2860 2861 /* Leave a few words of "slop". */ 2862 if (delta >= -1023 && delta <= 1022) 2863 return 1; 2864 2865 return 0; 2866} 2867 2868/* Return nonzero if REG is not used after INSN. 2869 We assume REG is a reload reg, and therefore does 2870 not live past labels or calls or jumps. */ 2871int 2872reg_unused_after (rtx reg, rtx insn) 2873{ 2874 enum rtx_code code, prev_code = UNKNOWN; 2875 2876 while ((insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))) 2877 { 2878 if (prev_code == CALL_INSN && call_used_regs[REGNO (reg)]) 2879 return 1; 2880 2881 code = GET_CODE (insn); 2882 if (GET_CODE (insn) == CODE_LABEL) 2883 return 1; 2884 2885 if (INSN_P (insn)) 2886 { 2887 rtx set = single_set (insn); 2888 int in_src = set && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg, SET_SRC (set)); 2889 if (set && in_src) 2890 return 0; 2891 if (set && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg, SET_DEST (set))) 2892 return 1; 2893 if (set == 0 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg, PATTERN (insn))) 2894 return 0; 2895 } 2896 prev_code = code; 2897 } 2898 return 1; 2899} 2900 2901/* Determine if it's legal to put X into the constant pool. This 2902 is not possible if X contains the address of a symbol that is 2903 not constant (TLS) or not known at final link time (PIC). */ 2904 2905static bool 2906sparc_cannot_force_const_mem (rtx x) 2907{ 2908 switch (GET_CODE (x)) 2909 { 2910 case CONST_INT: 2911 case CONST_DOUBLE: 2912 case CONST_VECTOR: 2913 /* Accept all non-symbolic constants. */ 2914 return false; 2915 2916 case LABEL_REF: 2917 /* Labels are OK iff we are non-PIC. */ 2918 return flag_pic != 0; 2919 2920 case SYMBOL_REF: 2921 /* 'Naked' TLS symbol references are never OK, 2922 non-TLS symbols are OK iff we are non-PIC. */ 2923 if (SYMBOL_REF_TLS_MODEL (x)) 2924 return true; 2925 else 2926 return flag_pic != 0; 2927 2928 case CONST: 2929 return sparc_cannot_force_const_mem (XEXP (x, 0)); 2930 case PLUS: 2931 case MINUS: 2932 return sparc_cannot_force_const_mem (XEXP (x, 0)) 2933 || sparc_cannot_force_const_mem (XEXP (x, 1)); 2934 case UNSPEC: 2935 return true; 2936 default: 2937 gcc_unreachable (); 2938 } 2939} 2940 2941/* Global Offset Table support. */ 2942static GTY(()) rtx got_helper_rtx = NULL_RTX; 2943static GTY(()) rtx global_offset_table_rtx = NULL_RTX; 2944 2945/* Return the SYMBOL_REF for the Global Offset Table. */ 2946 2947static GTY(()) rtx sparc_got_symbol = NULL_RTX; 2948 2949static rtx 2950sparc_got (void) 2951{ 2952 if (!sparc_got_symbol) 2953 sparc_got_symbol = gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, "_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_"); 2954 2955 return sparc_got_symbol; 2956} 2957 2958/* Ensure that we are not using patterns that are not OK with PIC. */ 2959 2960int 2961check_pic (int i) 2962{ 2963 rtx op; 2964 2965 switch (flag_pic) 2966 { 2967 case 1: 2968 op = recog_data.operand[i]; 2969 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (op) != SYMBOL_REF 2970 && (GET_CODE (op) != CONST 2971 || (GET_CODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == MINUS 2972 && XEXP (XEXP (op, 0), 0) == sparc_got () 2973 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op, 0), 1)) == CONST))); 2974 case 2: 2975 default: 2976 return 1; 2977 } 2978} 2979 2980/* Return true if X is an address which needs a temporary register when 2981 reloaded while generating PIC code. */ 2982 2983int 2984pic_address_needs_scratch (rtx x) 2985{ 2986 /* An address which is a symbolic plus a non SMALL_INT needs a temp reg. */ 2987 if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS 2988 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == SYMBOL_REF 2989 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT 2990 && ! SMALL_INT (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))) 2991 return 1; 2992 2993 return 0; 2994} 2995 2996/* Determine if a given RTX is a valid constant. We already know this 2997 satisfies CONSTANT_P. */ 2998 2999bool 3000legitimate_constant_p (rtx x) 3001{ 3002 switch (GET_CODE (x)) 3003 { 3004 case CONST: 3005 case SYMBOL_REF: 3006 if (sparc_tls_referenced_p (x)) 3007 return false; 3008 break; 3009 3010 case CONST_DOUBLE: 3011 if (GET_MODE (x) == VOIDmode) 3012 return true; 3013 3014 /* Floating point constants are generally not ok. 3015 The only exception is 0.0 in VIS. */ 3016 if (TARGET_VIS 3017 && SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x)) 3018 && const_zero_operand (x, GET_MODE (x))) 3019 return true; 3020 3021 return false; 3022 3023 case CONST_VECTOR: 3024 /* Vector constants are generally not ok. 3025 The only exception is 0 in VIS. */ 3026 if (TARGET_VIS 3027 && const_zero_operand (x, GET_MODE (x))) 3028 return true; 3029 3030 return false; 3031 3032 default: 3033 break; 3034 } 3035 3036 return true; 3037} 3038 3039/* Determine if a given RTX is a valid constant address. */ 3040 3041bool 3042constant_address_p (rtx x) 3043{ 3044 switch (GET_CODE (x)) 3045 { 3046 case LABEL_REF: 3047 case CONST_INT: 3048 case HIGH: 3049 return true; 3050 3051 case CONST: 3052 if (flag_pic && pic_address_needs_scratch (x)) 3053 return false; 3054 return legitimate_constant_p (x); 3055 3056 case SYMBOL_REF: 3057 return !flag_pic && legitimate_constant_p (x); 3058 3059 default: 3060 return false; 3061 } 3062} 3063 3064/* Nonzero if the constant value X is a legitimate general operand 3065 when generating PIC code. It is given that flag_pic is on and 3066 that X satisfies CONSTANT_P or is a CONST_DOUBLE. */ 3067 3068bool 3069legitimate_pic_operand_p (rtx x) 3070{ 3071 if (pic_address_needs_scratch (x)) 3072 return false; 3073 if (sparc_tls_referenced_p (x)) 3074 return false; 3075 return true; 3076} 3077 3078/* Return nonzero if ADDR is a valid memory address. 3079 STRICT specifies whether strict register checking applies. */ 3080 3081static bool 3082sparc_legitimate_address_p (enum machine_mode mode, rtx addr, bool strict) 3083{ 3084 rtx rs1 = NULL, rs2 = NULL, imm1 = NULL; 3085 3086 if (REG_P (addr) || GET_CODE (addr) == SUBREG) 3087 rs1 = addr; 3088 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == PLUS) 3089 { 3090 rs1 = XEXP (addr, 0); 3091 rs2 = XEXP (addr, 1); 3092 3093 /* Canonicalize. REG comes first, if there are no regs, 3094 LO_SUM comes first. */ 3095 if (!REG_P (rs1) 3096 && GET_CODE (rs1) != SUBREG 3097 && (REG_P (rs2) 3098 || GET_CODE (rs2) == SUBREG 3099 || (GET_CODE (rs2) == LO_SUM && GET_CODE (rs1) != LO_SUM))) 3100 { 3101 rs1 = XEXP (addr, 1); 3102 rs2 = XEXP (addr, 0); 3103 } 3104 3105 if ((flag_pic == 1 3106 && rs1 == pic_offset_table_rtx 3107 && !REG_P (rs2) 3108 && GET_CODE (rs2) != SUBREG 3109 && GET_CODE (rs2) != LO_SUM 3110 && GET_CODE (rs2) != MEM 3111 && !(GET_CODE (rs2) == SYMBOL_REF && SYMBOL_REF_TLS_MODEL (rs2)) 3112 && (! symbolic_operand (rs2, VOIDmode) || mode == Pmode) 3113 && (GET_CODE (rs2) != CONST_INT || SMALL_INT (rs2))) 3114 || ((REG_P (rs1) 3115 || GET_CODE (rs1) == SUBREG) 3116 && RTX_OK_FOR_OFFSET_P (rs2))) 3117 { 3118 imm1 = rs2; 3119 rs2 = NULL; 3120 } 3121 else if ((REG_P (rs1) || GET_CODE (rs1) == SUBREG) 3122 && (REG_P (rs2) || GET_CODE (rs2) == SUBREG)) 3123 { 3124 /* We prohibit REG + REG for TFmode when there are no quad move insns 3125 and we consequently need to split. We do this because REG+REG 3126 is not an offsettable address. If we get the situation in reload 3127 where source and destination of a movtf pattern are both MEMs with 3128 REG+REG address, then only one of them gets converted to an 3129 offsettable address. */ 3130 if (mode == TFmode 3131 && ! (TARGET_FPU && TARGET_ARCH64 && TARGET_HARD_QUAD)) 3132 return 0; 3133 3134 /* We prohibit REG + REG on ARCH32 if not optimizing for 3135 DFmode/DImode because then mem_min_alignment is likely to be zero 3136 after reload and the forced split would lack a matching splitter 3137 pattern. */ 3138 if (TARGET_ARCH32 && !optimize 3139 && (mode == DFmode || mode == DImode)) 3140 return 0; 3141 } 3142 else if (USE_AS_OFFSETABLE_LO10 3143 && GET_CODE (rs1) == LO_SUM 3144 && TARGET_ARCH64 3145 && ! TARGET_CM_MEDMID 3146 && RTX_OK_FOR_OLO10_P (rs2)) 3147 { 3148 rs2 = NULL; 3149 imm1 = XEXP (rs1, 1); 3150 rs1 = XEXP (rs1, 0); 3151 if (!CONSTANT_P (imm1) 3152 || (GET_CODE (rs1) == SYMBOL_REF && SYMBOL_REF_TLS_MODEL (rs1))) 3153 return 0; 3154 } 3155 } 3156 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == LO_SUM) 3157 { 3158 rs1 = XEXP (addr, 0); 3159 imm1 = XEXP (addr, 1); 3160 3161 if (!CONSTANT_P (imm1) 3162 || (GET_CODE (rs1) == SYMBOL_REF && SYMBOL_REF_TLS_MODEL (rs1))) 3163 return 0; 3164 3165 /* We can't allow TFmode in 32-bit mode, because an offset greater 3166 than the alignment (8) may cause the LO_SUM to overflow. */ 3167 if (mode == TFmode && TARGET_ARCH32) 3168 return 0; 3169 } 3170 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == CONST_INT && SMALL_INT (addr)) 3171 return 1; 3172 else 3173 return 0; 3174 3175 if (GET_CODE (rs1) == SUBREG) 3176 rs1 = SUBREG_REG (rs1); 3177 if (!REG_P (rs1)) 3178 return 0; 3179 3180 if (rs2) 3181 { 3182 if (GET_CODE (rs2) == SUBREG) 3183 rs2 = SUBREG_REG (rs2); 3184 if (!REG_P (rs2)) 3185 return 0; 3186 } 3187 3188 if (strict) 3189 { 3190 if (!REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (REGNO (rs1)) 3191 || (rs2 && !REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (REGNO (rs2)))) 3192 return 0; 3193 } 3194 else 3195 { 3196 if ((REGNO (rs1) >= 32 3197 && REGNO (rs1) != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM 3198 && REGNO (rs1) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER) 3199 || (rs2 3200 && (REGNO (rs2) >= 32 3201 && REGNO (rs2) != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM 3202 && REGNO (rs2) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))) 3203 return 0; 3204 } 3205 return 1; 3206} 3207 3208/* Return the SYMBOL_REF for the tls_get_addr function. */ 3209 3210static GTY(()) rtx sparc_tls_symbol = NULL_RTX; 3211 3212static rtx 3213sparc_tls_get_addr (void) 3214{ 3215 if (!sparc_tls_symbol) 3216 sparc_tls_symbol = gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, "__tls_get_addr"); 3217 3218 return sparc_tls_symbol; 3219} 3220 3221/* Return the Global Offset Table to be used in TLS mode. */ 3222 3223static rtx 3224sparc_tls_got (void) 3225{ 3226 /* In PIC mode, this is just the PIC offset table. */ 3227 if (flag_pic) 3228 { 3229 crtl->uses_pic_offset_table = 1; 3230 return pic_offset_table_rtx; 3231 } 3232 3233 /* In non-PIC mode, Sun as (unlike GNU as) emits PC-relative relocations for 3234 the GOT symbol with the 32-bit ABI, so we reload the GOT register. */ 3235 if (TARGET_SUN_TLS && TARGET_ARCH32) 3236 { 3237 load_got_register (); 3238 return global_offset_table_rtx; 3239 } 3240 3241 /* In all other cases, we load a new pseudo with the GOT symbol. */ 3242 return copy_to_reg (sparc_got ()); 3243} 3244 3245/* Return true if X contains a thread-local symbol. */ 3246 3247static bool 3248sparc_tls_referenced_p (rtx x) 3249{ 3250 if (!TARGET_HAVE_TLS) 3251 return false; 3252 3253 if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS) 3254 x = XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0); 3255 3256 if (GET_CODE (x) == SYMBOL_REF && SYMBOL_REF_TLS_MODEL (x)) 3257 return true; 3258 3259 /* That's all we handle in legitimize_tls_address for now. */ 3260 return false; 3261} 3262 3263/* ADDR contains a thread-local SYMBOL_REF. Generate code to compute 3264 this (thread-local) address. */ 3265 3266static rtx 3267legitimize_tls_address (rtx addr) 3268{ 3269 rtx temp1, temp2, temp3, ret, o0, got, insn; 3270 3271 gcc_assert (can_create_pseudo_p ()); 3272 3273 if (GET_CODE (addr) == SYMBOL_REF) 3274 switch (SYMBOL_REF_TLS_MODEL (addr)) 3275 { 3276 case TLS_MODEL_GLOBAL_DYNAMIC: 3277 start_sequence (); 3278 temp1 = gen_reg_rtx (SImode); 3279 temp2 = gen_reg_rtx (SImode); 3280 ret = gen_reg_rtx (Pmode); 3281 o0 = gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 8); 3282 got = sparc_tls_got (); 3283 emit_insn (gen_tgd_hi22 (temp1, addr)); 3284 emit_insn (gen_tgd_lo10 (temp2, temp1, addr)); 3285 if (TARGET_ARCH32) 3286 { 3287 emit_insn (gen_tgd_add32 (o0, got, temp2, addr)); 3288 insn = emit_call_insn (gen_tgd_call32 (o0, sparc_tls_get_addr (), 3289 addr, const1_rtx)); 3290 } 3291 else 3292 { 3293 emit_insn (gen_tgd_add64 (o0, got, temp2, addr)); 3294 insn = emit_call_insn (gen_tgd_call64 (o0, sparc_tls_get_addr (), 3295 addr, const1_rtx)); 3296 } 3297 CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (insn) 3298 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, gen_rtx_USE (VOIDmode, o0), 3299 CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (insn)); 3300 insn = get_insns (); 3301 end_sequence (); 3302 emit_libcall_block (insn, ret, o0, addr); 3303 break; 3304 3305 case TLS_MODEL_LOCAL_DYNAMIC: 3306 start_sequence (); 3307 temp1 = gen_reg_rtx (SImode); 3308 temp2 = gen_reg_rtx (SImode); 3309 temp3 = gen_reg_rtx (Pmode); 3310 ret = gen_reg_rtx (Pmode); 3311 o0 = gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 8); 3312 got = sparc_tls_got (); 3313 emit_insn (gen_tldm_hi22 (temp1)); 3314 emit_insn (gen_tldm_lo10 (temp2, temp1)); 3315 if (TARGET_ARCH32) 3316 { 3317 emit_insn (gen_tldm_add32 (o0, got, temp2)); 3318 insn = emit_call_insn (gen_tldm_call32 (o0, sparc_tls_get_addr (), 3319 const1_rtx)); 3320 } 3321 else 3322 { 3323 emit_insn (gen_tldm_add64 (o0, got, temp2)); 3324 insn = emit_call_insn (gen_tldm_call64 (o0, sparc_tls_get_addr (), 3325 const1_rtx)); 3326 } 3327 CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (insn) 3328 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, gen_rtx_USE (VOIDmode, o0), 3329 CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (insn)); 3330 insn = get_insns (); 3331 end_sequence (); 3332 emit_libcall_block (insn, temp3, o0, 3333 gen_rtx_UNSPEC (Pmode, gen_rtvec (1, const0_rtx), 3334 UNSPEC_TLSLD_BASE)); 3335 temp1 = gen_reg_rtx (SImode); 3336 temp2 = gen_reg_rtx (SImode); 3337 emit_insn (gen_tldo_hix22 (temp1, addr)); 3338 emit_insn (gen_tldo_lox10 (temp2, temp1, addr)); 3339 if (TARGET_ARCH32) 3340 emit_insn (gen_tldo_add32 (ret, temp3, temp2, addr)); 3341 else 3342 emit_insn (gen_tldo_add64 (ret, temp3, temp2, addr)); 3343 break; 3344 3345 case TLS_MODEL_INITIAL_EXEC: 3346 temp1 = gen_reg_rtx (SImode); 3347 temp2 = gen_reg_rtx (SImode); 3348 temp3 = gen_reg_rtx (Pmode); 3349 got = sparc_tls_got (); 3350 emit_insn (gen_tie_hi22 (temp1, addr)); 3351 emit_insn (gen_tie_lo10 (temp2, temp1, addr)); 3352 if (TARGET_ARCH32) 3353 emit_insn (gen_tie_ld32 (temp3, got, temp2, addr)); 3354 else 3355 emit_insn (gen_tie_ld64 (temp3, got, temp2, addr)); 3356 if (TARGET_SUN_TLS) 3357 { 3358 ret = gen_reg_rtx (Pmode); 3359 if (TARGET_ARCH32) 3360 emit_insn (gen_tie_add32 (ret, gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 7), 3361 temp3, addr)); 3362 else 3363 emit_insn (gen_tie_add64 (ret, gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 7), 3364 temp3, addr)); 3365 } 3366 else 3367 ret = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 7), temp3); 3368 break; 3369 3370 case TLS_MODEL_LOCAL_EXEC: 3371 temp1 = gen_reg_rtx (Pmode); 3372 temp2 = gen_reg_rtx (Pmode); 3373 if (TARGET_ARCH32) 3374 { 3375 emit_insn (gen_tle_hix22_sp32 (temp1, addr)); 3376 emit_insn (gen_tle_lox10_sp32 (temp2, temp1, addr)); 3377 } 3378 else 3379 { 3380 emit_insn (gen_tle_hix22_sp64 (temp1, addr)); 3381 emit_insn (gen_tle_lox10_sp64 (temp2, temp1, addr)); 3382 } 3383 ret = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 7), temp2); 3384 break; 3385 3386 default: 3387 gcc_unreachable (); 3388 } 3389 3390 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == CONST) 3391 { 3392 rtx base, offset; 3393 3394 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == PLUS); 3395 3396 base = legitimize_tls_address (XEXP (XEXP (addr, 0), 0)); 3397 offset = XEXP (XEXP (addr, 0), 1); 3398 3399 base = force_operand (base, NULL_RTX); 3400 if (!(GET_CODE (offset) == CONST_INT && SMALL_INT (offset))) 3401 offset = force_reg (Pmode, offset); 3402 ret = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, base, offset); 3403 } 3404 3405 else 3406 gcc_unreachable (); /* for now ... */ 3407 3408 return ret; 3409} 3410 3411/* Legitimize PIC addresses. If the address is already position-independent, 3412 we return ORIG. Newly generated position-independent addresses go into a 3413 reg. This is REG if nonzero, otherwise we allocate register(s) as 3414 necessary. */ 3415 3416static rtx 3417legitimize_pic_address (rtx orig, rtx reg) 3418{ 3419 bool gotdata_op = false; 3420 3421 if (GET_CODE (orig) == SYMBOL_REF 3422 /* See the comment in sparc_expand_move. */ 3423 || (GET_CODE (orig) == LABEL_REF && !can_use_mov_pic_label_ref (orig))) 3424 { 3425 rtx pic_ref, address; 3426 rtx insn; 3427 3428 if (reg == 0) 3429 { 3430 gcc_assert (! reload_in_progress && ! reload_completed); 3431 reg = gen_reg_rtx (Pmode); 3432 } 3433 3434 if (flag_pic == 2) 3435 { 3436 /* If not during reload, allocate another temp reg here for loading 3437 in the address, so that these instructions can be optimized 3438 properly. */ 3439 rtx temp_reg = ((reload_in_progress || reload_completed) 3440 ? reg : gen_reg_rtx (Pmode)); 3441 3442 /* Must put the SYMBOL_REF inside an UNSPEC here so that cse 3443 won't get confused into thinking that these two instructions 3444 are loading in the true address of the symbol. If in the 3445 future a PIC rtx exists, that should be used instead. */ 3446 if (TARGET_ARCH64) 3447 { 3448 emit_insn (gen_movdi_high_pic (temp_reg, orig)); 3449 emit_insn (gen_movdi_lo_sum_pic (temp_reg, temp_reg, orig)); 3450 } 3451 else 3452 { 3453 emit_insn (gen_movsi_high_pic (temp_reg, orig)); 3454 emit_insn (gen_movsi_lo_sum_pic (temp_reg, temp_reg, orig)); 3455 } 3456 address = temp_reg; 3457 gotdata_op = true; 3458 } 3459 else 3460 address = orig; 3461 3462 crtl->uses_pic_offset_table = 1; 3463 if (gotdata_op) 3464 { 3465 if (TARGET_ARCH64) 3466 insn = emit_insn (gen_movdi_pic_gotdata_op (reg, pic_offset_table_rtx, 3467 address, orig)); 3468 else 3469 insn = emit_insn (gen_movsi_pic_gotdata_op (reg, pic_offset_table_rtx, 3470 address, orig)); 3471 } 3472 else 3473 { 3474 pic_ref 3475 = gen_const_mem (Pmode, 3476 gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, 3477 pic_offset_table_rtx, address)); 3478 insn = emit_move_insn (reg, pic_ref); 3479 } 3480 3481 /* Put a REG_EQUAL note on this insn, so that it can be optimized 3482 by loop. */ 3483 set_unique_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, orig); 3484 return reg; 3485 } 3486 else if (GET_CODE (orig) == CONST) 3487 { 3488 rtx base, offset; 3489 3490 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (orig, 0)) == PLUS 3491 && XEXP (XEXP (orig, 0), 0) == pic_offset_table_rtx) 3492 return orig; 3493 3494 if (reg == 0) 3495 { 3496 gcc_assert (! reload_in_progress && ! reload_completed); 3497 reg = gen_reg_rtx (Pmode); 3498 } 3499 3500 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (XEXP (orig, 0)) == PLUS); 3501 base = legitimize_pic_address (XEXP (XEXP (orig, 0), 0), reg); 3502 offset = legitimize_pic_address (XEXP (XEXP (orig, 0), 1), 3503 base == reg ? NULL_RTX : reg); 3504 3505 if (GET_CODE (offset) == CONST_INT) 3506 { 3507 if (SMALL_INT (offset)) 3508 return plus_constant (base, INTVAL (offset)); 3509 else if (! reload_in_progress && ! reload_completed) 3510 offset = force_reg (Pmode, offset); 3511 else 3512 /* If we reach here, then something is seriously wrong. */ 3513 gcc_unreachable (); 3514 } 3515 return gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, base, offset); 3516 } 3517 else if (GET_CODE (orig) == LABEL_REF) 3518 /* ??? We ought to be checking that the register is live instead, in case 3519 it is eliminated. */ 3520 crtl->uses_pic_offset_table = 1; 3521 3522 return orig; 3523} 3524 3525/* Try machine-dependent ways of modifying an illegitimate address X 3526 to be legitimate. If we find one, return the new, valid address. 3527 3528 OLDX is the address as it was before break_out_memory_refs was called. 3529 In some cases it is useful to look at this to decide what needs to be done. 3530 3531 MODE is the mode of the operand pointed to by X. 3532 3533 On SPARC, change REG+N into REG+REG, and REG+(X*Y) into REG+REG. */ 3534 3535static rtx 3536sparc_legitimize_address (rtx x, rtx oldx ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, 3537 enum machine_mode mode) 3538{ 3539 rtx orig_x = x; 3540 3541 if (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == MULT) 3542 x = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, XEXP (x, 1), 3543 force_operand (XEXP (x, 0), NULL_RTX)); 3544 if (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == MULT) 3545 x = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, XEXP (x, 0), 3546 force_operand (XEXP (x, 1), NULL_RTX)); 3547 if (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS) 3548 x = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, force_operand (XEXP (x, 0), NULL_RTX), 3549 XEXP (x, 1)); 3550 if (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == PLUS) 3551 x = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, XEXP (x, 0), 3552 force_operand (XEXP (x, 1), NULL_RTX)); 3553 3554 if (x != orig_x && sparc_legitimate_address_p (mode, x, FALSE)) 3555 return x; 3556 3557 if (sparc_tls_referenced_p (x)) 3558 x = legitimize_tls_address (x); 3559 else if (flag_pic) 3560 x = legitimize_pic_address (x, NULL_RTX); 3561 else if (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS && CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (XEXP (x, 1))) 3562 x = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, XEXP (x, 0), 3563 copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode, XEXP (x, 1))); 3564 else if (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS && CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (XEXP (x, 0))) 3565 x = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, XEXP (x, 1), 3566 copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode, XEXP (x, 0))); 3567 else if (GET_CODE (x) == SYMBOL_REF 3568 || GET_CODE (x) == CONST 3569 || GET_CODE (x) == LABEL_REF) 3570 x = copy_to_suggested_reg (x, NULL_RTX, Pmode); 3571 3572 return x; 3573} 3574 3575#ifdef HAVE_GAS_HIDDEN 3576# define USE_HIDDEN_LINKONCE 1 3577#else 3578# define USE_HIDDEN_LINKONCE 0 3579#endif 3580 3581static void 3582get_pc_thunk_name (char name[32], unsigned int regno) 3583{ 3584 const char *reg_name = reg_names[regno]; 3585 3586 /* Skip the leading '%' as that cannot be used in a 3587 symbol name. */ 3588 reg_name += 1; 3589 3590 if (USE_HIDDEN_LINKONCE) 3591 sprintf (name, "__sparc_get_pc_thunk.%s", reg_name); 3592 else 3593 ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (name, "LADDPC", regno); 3594} 3595 3596/* Wrapper around the load_pcrel_sym{si,di} patterns. */ 3597 3598static rtx 3599gen_load_pcrel_sym (rtx op0, rtx op1, rtx op2, rtx op3) 3600{ 3601 int orig_flag_pic = flag_pic; 3602 rtx insn; 3603 3604 /* The load_pcrel_sym{si,di} patterns require absolute addressing. */ 3605 flag_pic = 0; 3606 if (TARGET_ARCH64) 3607 insn = gen_load_pcrel_symdi (op0, op1, op2, op3); 3608 else 3609 insn = gen_load_pcrel_symsi (op0, op1, op2, op3); 3610 flag_pic = orig_flag_pic; 3611 3612 return insn; 3613} 3614 3615/* Emit code to load the GOT register. */ 3616 3617static void 3618load_got_register (void) 3619{ 3620 /* In PIC mode, this will retrieve pic_offset_table_rtx. */ 3621 if (!global_offset_table_rtx) 3622 global_offset_table_rtx = gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM); 3623 3624 if (TARGET_VXWORKS_RTP) 3625 emit_insn (gen_vxworks_load_got ()); 3626 else 3627 { 3628 /* The GOT symbol is subject to a PC-relative relocation so we need a 3629 helper function to add the PC value and thus get the final value. */ 3630 if (!got_helper_rtx) 3631 { 3632 char name[32]; 3633 get_pc_thunk_name (name, GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM); 3634 got_helper_rtx = gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, ggc_strdup (name)); 3635 } 3636 3637 emit_insn (gen_load_pcrel_sym (global_offset_table_rtx, sparc_got (), 3638 got_helper_rtx, 3639 GEN_INT (GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM))); 3640 } 3641 3642 /* Need to emit this whether or not we obey regdecls, 3643 since setjmp/longjmp can cause life info to screw up. 3644 ??? In the case where we don't obey regdecls, this is not sufficient 3645 since we may not fall out the bottom. */ 3646 emit_use (global_offset_table_rtx); 3647} 3648 3649/* Emit a call instruction with the pattern given by PAT. ADDR is the 3650 address of the call target. */ 3651 3652void 3653sparc_emit_call_insn (rtx pat, rtx addr) 3654{ 3655 rtx insn; 3656 3657 insn = emit_call_insn (pat); 3658 3659 /* The PIC register is live on entry to VxWorks PIC PLT entries. */ 3660 if (TARGET_VXWORKS_RTP 3661 && flag_pic 3662 && GET_CODE (addr) == SYMBOL_REF 3663 && (SYMBOL_REF_DECL (addr) 3664 ? !targetm.binds_local_p (SYMBOL_REF_DECL (addr)) 3665 : !SYMBOL_REF_LOCAL_P (addr))) 3666 { 3667 use_reg (&CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (insn), pic_offset_table_rtx); 3668 crtl->uses_pic_offset_table = 1; 3669 } 3670} 3671 3672/* Return 1 if RTX is a MEM which is known to be aligned to at 3673 least a DESIRED byte boundary. */ 3674 3675int 3676mem_min_alignment (rtx mem, int desired) 3677{ 3678 rtx addr, base, offset; 3679 3680 /* If it's not a MEM we can't accept it. */ 3681 if (GET_CODE (mem) != MEM) 3682 return 0; 3683 3684 /* Obviously... */ 3685 if (!TARGET_UNALIGNED_DOUBLES 3686 && MEM_ALIGN (mem) / BITS_PER_UNIT >= (unsigned)desired) 3687 return 1; 3688 3689 /* ??? The rest of the function predates MEM_ALIGN so 3690 there is probably a bit of redundancy. */ 3691 addr = XEXP (mem, 0); 3692 base = offset = NULL_RTX; 3693 if (GET_CODE (addr) == PLUS) 3694 { 3695 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == REG) 3696 { 3697 base = XEXP (addr, 0); 3698 3699 /* What we are saying here is that if the base 3700 REG is aligned properly, the compiler will make 3701 sure any REG based index upon it will be so 3702 as well. */ 3703 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == CONST_INT) 3704 offset = XEXP (addr, 1); 3705 else 3706 offset = const0_rtx; 3707 } 3708 } 3709 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == REG) 3710 { 3711 base = addr; 3712 offset = const0_rtx; 3713 } 3714 3715 if (base != NULL_RTX) 3716 { 3717 int regno = REGNO (base); 3718 3719 if (regno != HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM && regno != STACK_POINTER_REGNUM) 3720 { 3721 /* Check if the compiler has recorded some information 3722 about the alignment of the base REG. If reload has 3723 completed, we already matched with proper alignments. 3724 If not running global_alloc, reload might give us 3725 unaligned pointer to local stack though. */ 3726 if (((cfun != 0 3727 && REGNO_POINTER_ALIGN (regno) >= desired * BITS_PER_UNIT) 3728 || (optimize && reload_completed)) 3729 && (INTVAL (offset) & (desired - 1)) == 0) 3730 return 1; 3731 } 3732 else 3733 { 3734 if (((INTVAL (offset) - SPARC_STACK_BIAS) & (desired - 1)) == 0) 3735 return 1; 3736 } 3737 } 3738 else if (! TARGET_UNALIGNED_DOUBLES 3739 || CONSTANT_P (addr) 3740 || GET_CODE (addr) == LO_SUM) 3741 { 3742 /* Anything else we know is properly aligned unless TARGET_UNALIGNED_DOUBLES 3743 is true, in which case we can only assume that an access is aligned if 3744 it is to a constant address, or the address involves a LO_SUM. */ 3745 return 1; 3746 } 3747 3748 /* An obviously unaligned address. */ 3749 return 0; 3750} 3751 3752 3753/* Vectors to keep interesting information about registers where it can easily 3754 be got. We used to use the actual mode value as the bit number, but there 3755 are more than 32 modes now. Instead we use two tables: one indexed by 3756 hard register number, and one indexed by mode. */ 3757 3758/* The purpose of sparc_mode_class is to shrink the range of modes so that 3759 they all fit (as bit numbers) in a 32-bit word (again). Each real mode is 3760 mapped into one sparc_mode_class mode. */ 3761 3762enum sparc_mode_class { 3763 S_MODE, D_MODE, T_MODE, O_MODE, 3764 SF_MODE, DF_MODE, TF_MODE, OF_MODE, 3765 CC_MODE, CCFP_MODE 3766}; 3767 3768/* Modes for single-word and smaller quantities. */ 3769#define S_MODES ((1 << (int) S_MODE) | (1 << (int) SF_MODE)) 3770 3771/* Modes for double-word and smaller quantities. */ 3772#define D_MODES (S_MODES | (1 << (int) D_MODE) | (1 << DF_MODE)) 3773 3774/* Modes for quad-word and smaller quantities. */ 3775#define T_MODES (D_MODES | (1 << (int) T_MODE) | (1 << (int) TF_MODE)) 3776 3777/* Modes for 8-word and smaller quantities. */ 3778#define O_MODES (T_MODES | (1 << (int) O_MODE) | (1 << (int) OF_MODE)) 3779 3780/* Modes for single-float quantities. We must allow any single word or 3781 smaller quantity. This is because the fix/float conversion instructions 3782 take integer inputs/outputs from the float registers. */ 3783#define SF_MODES (S_MODES) 3784 3785/* Modes for double-float and smaller quantities. */ 3786#define DF_MODES (D_MODES) 3787 3788/* Modes for quad-float and smaller quantities. */ 3789#define TF_MODES (DF_MODES | (1 << (int) TF_MODE)) 3790 3791/* Modes for quad-float pairs and smaller quantities. */ 3792#define OF_MODES (TF_MODES | (1 << (int) OF_MODE)) 3793 3794/* Modes for double-float only quantities. */ 3795#define DF_MODES_NO_S ((1 << (int) D_MODE) | (1 << (int) DF_MODE)) 3796 3797/* Modes for quad-float and double-float only quantities. */ 3798#define TF_MODES_NO_S (DF_MODES_NO_S | (1 << (int) TF_MODE)) 3799 3800/* Modes for quad-float pairs and double-float only quantities. */ 3801#define OF_MODES_NO_S (TF_MODES_NO_S | (1 << (int) OF_MODE)) 3802 3803/* Modes for condition codes. */ 3804#define CC_MODES (1 << (int) CC_MODE) 3805#define CCFP_MODES (1 << (int) CCFP_MODE) 3806 3807/* Value is 1 if register/mode pair is acceptable on sparc. 3808 The funny mixture of D and T modes is because integer operations 3809 do not specially operate on tetra quantities, so non-quad-aligned 3810 registers can hold quadword quantities (except %o4 and %i4 because 3811 they cross fixed registers). */ 3812 3813/* This points to either the 32 bit or the 64 bit version. */ 3814const int *hard_regno_mode_classes; 3815 3816static const int hard_32bit_mode_classes[] = { 3817 S_MODES, S_MODES, T_MODES, S_MODES, T_MODES, S_MODES, D_MODES, S_MODES, 3818 T_MODES, S_MODES, T_MODES, S_MODES, D_MODES, S_MODES, D_MODES, S_MODES, 3819 T_MODES, S_MODES, T_MODES, S_MODES, T_MODES, S_MODES, D_MODES, S_MODES, 3820 T_MODES, S_MODES, T_MODES, S_MODES, D_MODES, S_MODES, D_MODES, S_MODES, 3821 3822 OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, 3823 OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, 3824 OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, 3825 OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, TF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, 3826 3827 /* FP regs f32 to f63. Only the even numbered registers actually exist, 3828 and none can hold SFmode/SImode values. */ 3829 OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, 3830 OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, 3831 OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, 3832 OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, TF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, 3833 3834 /* %fcc[0123] */ 3835 CCFP_MODES, CCFP_MODES, CCFP_MODES, CCFP_MODES, 3836 3837 /* %icc */ 3838 CC_MODES 3839}; 3840 3841static const int hard_64bit_mode_classes[] = { 3842 D_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, 3843 O_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, 3844 T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, 3845 O_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, 3846 3847 OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, 3848 OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, 3849 OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, 3850 OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, TF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, 3851 3852 /* FP regs f32 to f63. Only the even numbered registers actually exist, 3853 and none can hold SFmode/SImode values. */ 3854 OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, 3855 OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, 3856 OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, 3857 OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, TF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, 3858 3859 /* %fcc[0123] */ 3860 CCFP_MODES, CCFP_MODES, CCFP_MODES, CCFP_MODES, 3861 3862 /* %icc */ 3863 CC_MODES 3864}; 3865 3866int sparc_mode_class [NUM_MACHINE_MODES]; 3867 3868enum reg_class sparc_regno_reg_class[FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER]; 3869 3870static void 3871sparc_init_modes (void) 3872{ 3873 int i; 3874 3875 for (i = 0; i < NUM_MACHINE_MODES; i++) 3876 { 3877 switch (GET_MODE_CLASS (i)) 3878 { 3879 case MODE_INT: 3880 case MODE_PARTIAL_INT: 3881 case MODE_COMPLEX_INT: 3882 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) <= 4) 3883 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) S_MODE; 3884 else if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) == 8) 3885 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) D_MODE; 3886 else if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) == 16) 3887 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) T_MODE; 3888 else if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) == 32) 3889 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) O_MODE; 3890 else 3891 sparc_mode_class[i] = 0; 3892 break; 3893 case MODE_VECTOR_INT: 3894 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) <= 4) 3895 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int)SF_MODE; 3896 else if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) == 8) 3897 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int)DF_MODE; 3898 break; 3899 case MODE_FLOAT: 3900 case MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT: 3901 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) <= 4) 3902 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) SF_MODE; 3903 else if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) == 8) 3904 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) DF_MODE; 3905 else if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) == 16) 3906 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) TF_MODE; 3907 else if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) == 32) 3908 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) OF_MODE; 3909 else 3910 sparc_mode_class[i] = 0; 3911 break; 3912 case MODE_CC: 3913 if (i == (int) CCFPmode || i == (int) CCFPEmode) 3914 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) CCFP_MODE; 3915 else 3916 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) CC_MODE; 3917 break; 3918 default: 3919 sparc_mode_class[i] = 0; 3920 break; 3921 } 3922 } 3923 3924 if (TARGET_ARCH64) 3925 hard_regno_mode_classes = hard_64bit_mode_classes; 3926 else 3927 hard_regno_mode_classes = hard_32bit_mode_classes; 3928 3929 /* Initialize the array used by REGNO_REG_CLASS. */ 3930 for (i = 0; i < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER; i++) 3931 { 3932 if (i < 16 && TARGET_V8PLUS) 3933 sparc_regno_reg_class[i] = I64_REGS; 3934 else if (i < 32 || i == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM) 3935 sparc_regno_reg_class[i] = GENERAL_REGS; 3936 else if (i < 64) 3937 sparc_regno_reg_class[i] = FP_REGS; 3938 else if (i < 96) 3939 sparc_regno_reg_class[i] = EXTRA_FP_REGS; 3940 else if (i < 100) 3941 sparc_regno_reg_class[i] = FPCC_REGS; 3942 else 3943 sparc_regno_reg_class[i] = NO_REGS; 3944 } 3945} 3946 3947/* Compute the frame size required by the function. This function is called 3948 during the reload pass and also by sparc_expand_prologue. */ 3949 3950HOST_WIDE_INT 3951sparc_compute_frame_size (HOST_WIDE_INT size, int leaf_function_p) 3952{ 3953 int outgoing_args_size = (crtl->outgoing_args_size 3954 + REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (current_function_decl)); 3955 int n_regs = 0; /* N_REGS is the number of 4-byte regs saved thus far. */ 3956 int i; 3957 3958 if (TARGET_ARCH64) 3959 { 3960 for (i = 0; i < 8; i++) 3961 if (df_regs_ever_live_p (i) && ! call_used_regs[i]) 3962 n_regs += 2; 3963 } 3964 else 3965 { 3966 for (i = 0; i < 8; i += 2) 3967 if ((df_regs_ever_live_p (i) && ! call_used_regs[i]) 3968 || (df_regs_ever_live_p (i+1) && ! call_used_regs[i+1])) 3969 n_regs += 2; 3970 } 3971 3972 for (i = 32; i < (TARGET_V9 ? 96 : 64); i += 2) 3973 if ((df_regs_ever_live_p (i) && ! call_used_regs[i]) 3974 || (df_regs_ever_live_p (i+1) && ! call_used_regs[i+1])) 3975 n_regs += 2; 3976 3977 /* Set up values for use in prologue and epilogue. */ 3978 num_gfregs = n_regs; 3979 3980 if (leaf_function_p 3981 && n_regs == 0 3982 && size == 0 3983 && crtl->outgoing_args_size == 0) 3984 actual_fsize = apparent_fsize = 0; 3985 else 3986 { 3987 /* We subtract STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET, remember it's negative. */ 3988 apparent_fsize = (size - STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET + 7) & -8; 3989 apparent_fsize += n_regs * 4; 3990 actual_fsize = apparent_fsize + ((outgoing_args_size + 7) & -8); 3991 } 3992 3993 /* Make sure nothing can clobber our register windows. 3994 If a SAVE must be done, or there is a stack-local variable, 3995 the register window area must be allocated. */ 3996 if (! leaf_function_p || size > 0) 3997 actual_fsize += FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (current_function_decl); 3998 3999 return SPARC_STACK_ALIGN (actual_fsize); 4000} 4001 4002/* Output any necessary .register pseudo-ops. */ 4003 4004void 4005sparc_output_scratch_registers (FILE *file ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED) 4006{ 4007#ifdef HAVE_AS_REGISTER_PSEUDO_OP 4008 int i; 4009 4010 if (TARGET_ARCH32) 4011 return; 4012 4013 /* Check if %g[2367] were used without 4014 .register being printed for them already. */ 4015 for (i = 2; i < 8; i++) 4016 { 4017 if (df_regs_ever_live_p (i) 4018 && ! sparc_hard_reg_printed [i]) 4019 { 4020 sparc_hard_reg_printed [i] = 1; 4021 /* %g7 is used as TLS base register, use #ignore 4022 for it instead of #scratch. */ 4023 fprintf (file, "\t.register\t%%g%d, #%s\n", i, 4024 i == 7 ? "ignore" : "scratch"); 4025 } 4026 if (i == 3) i = 5; 4027 } 4028#endif 4029} 4030 4031/* Save/restore call-saved registers from LOW to HIGH at BASE+OFFSET 4032 as needed. LOW should be double-word aligned for 32-bit registers. 4033 Return the new OFFSET. */ 4034 4035#define SORR_SAVE 0 4036#define SORR_RESTORE 1 4037 4038static int 4039save_or_restore_regs (int low, int high, rtx base, int offset, int action) 4040{ 4041 rtx mem, insn; 4042 int i; 4043 4044 if (TARGET_ARCH64 && high <= 32) 4045 { 4046 for (i = low; i < high; i++) 4047 { 4048 if (df_regs_ever_live_p (i) && ! call_used_regs[i]) 4049 { 4050 mem = gen_rtx_MEM (DImode, plus_constant (base, offset)); 4051 set_mem_alias_set (mem, sparc_sr_alias_set); 4052 if (action == SORR_SAVE) 4053 { 4054 insn = emit_move_insn (mem, gen_rtx_REG (DImode, i)); 4055 RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P (insn) = 1; 4056 } 4057 else /* action == SORR_RESTORE */ 4058 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_REG (DImode, i), mem); 4059 offset += 8; 4060 } 4061 } 4062 } 4063 else 4064 { 4065 for (i = low; i < high; i += 2) 4066 { 4067 bool reg0 = df_regs_ever_live_p (i) && ! call_used_regs[i]; 4068 bool reg1 = df_regs_ever_live_p (i+1) && ! call_used_regs[i+1]; 4069 enum machine_mode mode; 4070 int regno; 4071 4072 if (reg0 && reg1) 4073 { 4074 mode = i < 32 ? DImode : DFmode; 4075 regno = i; 4076 } 4077 else if (reg0) 4078 { 4079 mode = i < 32 ? SImode : SFmode; 4080 regno = i; 4081 } 4082 else if (reg1) 4083 { 4084 mode = i < 32 ? SImode : SFmode; 4085 regno = i + 1; 4086 offset += 4; 4087 } 4088 else 4089 continue; 4090 4091 mem = gen_rtx_MEM (mode, plus_constant (base, offset)); 4092 set_mem_alias_set (mem, sparc_sr_alias_set); 4093 if (action == SORR_SAVE) 4094 { 4095 insn = emit_move_insn (mem, gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno)); 4096 RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P (insn) = 1; 4097 } 4098 else /* action == SORR_RESTORE */ 4099 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno), mem); 4100 4101 /* Always preserve double-word alignment. */ 4102 offset = (offset + 8) & -8; 4103 } 4104 } 4105 4106 return offset; 4107} 4108 4109/* Emit code to save call-saved registers. */ 4110 4111static void 4112emit_save_or_restore_regs (int action) 4113{ 4114 HOST_WIDE_INT offset; 4115 rtx base; 4116 4117 offset = frame_base_offset - apparent_fsize; 4118 4119 if (offset < -4096 || offset + num_gfregs * 4 > 4095) 4120 { 4121 /* ??? This might be optimized a little as %g1 might already have a 4122 value close enough that a single add insn will do. */ 4123 /* ??? Although, all of this is probably only a temporary fix 4124 because if %g1 can hold a function result, then 4125 sparc_expand_epilogue will lose (the result will be 4126 clobbered). */ 4127 base = gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 1); 4128 emit_move_insn (base, GEN_INT (offset)); 4129 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, 4130 base, 4131 gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, frame_base_reg, base))); 4132 offset = 0; 4133 } 4134 else 4135 base = frame_base_reg; 4136 4137 offset = save_or_restore_regs (0, 8, base, offset, action); 4138 save_or_restore_regs (32, TARGET_V9 ? 96 : 64, base, offset, action); 4139} 4140 4141/* Generate a save_register_window insn. */ 4142 4143static rtx 4144gen_save_register_window (rtx increment) 4145{ 4146 if (TARGET_ARCH64) 4147 return gen_save_register_windowdi (increment); 4148 else 4149 return gen_save_register_windowsi (increment); 4150} 4151 4152/* Generate an increment for the stack pointer. */ 4153 4154static rtx 4155gen_stack_pointer_inc (rtx increment) 4156{ 4157 return gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, 4158 stack_pointer_rtx, 4159 gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, 4160 stack_pointer_rtx, 4161 increment)); 4162} 4163 4164/* Generate a decrement for the stack pointer. */ 4165 4166static rtx 4167gen_stack_pointer_dec (rtx decrement) 4168{ 4169 return gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, 4170 stack_pointer_rtx, 4171 gen_rtx_MINUS (Pmode, 4172 stack_pointer_rtx, 4173 decrement)); 4174} 4175 4176/* Expand the function prologue. The prologue is responsible for reserving 4177 storage for the frame, saving the call-saved registers and loading the 4178 GOT register if needed. */ 4179 4180void 4181sparc_expand_prologue (void) 4182{ 4183 rtx insn; 4184 int i; 4185 4186 /* Compute a snapshot of current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs. Relying 4187 on the final value of the flag means deferring the prologue/epilogue 4188 expansion until just before the second scheduling pass, which is too 4189 late to emit multiple epilogues or return insns. 4190 4191 Of course we are making the assumption that the value of the flag 4192 will not change between now and its final value. Of the three parts 4193 of the formula, only the last one can reasonably vary. Let's take a 4194 closer look, after assuming that the first two ones are set to true 4195 (otherwise the last value is effectively silenced). 4196 4197 If only_leaf_regs_used returns false, the global predicate will also 4198 be false so the actual frame size calculated below will be positive. 4199 As a consequence, the save_register_window insn will be emitted in 4200 the instruction stream; now this insn explicitly references %fp 4201 which is not a leaf register so only_leaf_regs_used will always 4202 return false subsequently. 4203 4204 If only_leaf_regs_used returns true, we hope that the subsequent 4205 optimization passes won't cause non-leaf registers to pop up. For 4206 example, the regrename pass has special provisions to not rename to 4207 non-leaf registers in a leaf function. */ 4208 sparc_leaf_function_p 4209 = optimize > 0 && current_function_is_leaf && only_leaf_regs_used (); 4210 4211 /* Need to use actual_fsize, since we are also allocating 4212 space for our callee (and our own register save area). */ 4213 actual_fsize 4214 = sparc_compute_frame_size (get_frame_size(), sparc_leaf_function_p); 4215 4216 /* Advertise that the data calculated just above are now valid. */ 4217 sparc_prologue_data_valid_p = true; 4218 4219 if (sparc_leaf_function_p) 4220 { 4221 frame_base_reg = stack_pointer_rtx; 4222 frame_base_offset = actual_fsize + SPARC_STACK_BIAS; 4223 } 4224 else 4225 { 4226 frame_base_reg = hard_frame_pointer_rtx; 4227 frame_base_offset = SPARC_STACK_BIAS; 4228 } 4229 4230 if (actual_fsize == 0) 4231 /* do nothing. */ ; 4232 else if (sparc_leaf_function_p) 4233 { 4234 if (actual_fsize <= 4096) 4235 insn = emit_insn (gen_stack_pointer_inc (GEN_INT (-actual_fsize))); 4236 else if (actual_fsize <= 8192) 4237 { 4238 insn = emit_insn (gen_stack_pointer_inc (GEN_INT (-4096))); 4239 RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P (insn) = 1; 4240 4241 /* %sp is still the CFA register. */ 4242 insn 4243 = emit_insn (gen_stack_pointer_inc (GEN_INT (4096-actual_fsize))); 4244 } 4245 else 4246 { 4247 rtx reg = gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 1); 4248 emit_move_insn (reg, GEN_INT (-actual_fsize)); 4249 insn = emit_insn (gen_stack_pointer_inc (reg)); 4250 add_reg_note (insn, REG_FRAME_RELATED_EXPR, 4251 gen_stack_pointer_inc (GEN_INT (-actual_fsize))); 4252 } 4253 4254 RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P (insn) = 1; 4255 } 4256 else 4257 { 4258 if (actual_fsize <= 4096) 4259 insn = emit_insn (gen_save_register_window (GEN_INT (-actual_fsize))); 4260 else if (actual_fsize <= 8192) 4261 { 4262 insn = emit_insn (gen_save_register_window (GEN_INT (-4096))); 4263 4264 /* %sp is not the CFA register anymore. */ 4265 emit_insn (gen_stack_pointer_inc (GEN_INT (4096-actual_fsize))); 4266 4267 /* Make sure no %fp-based store is issued until after the frame is 4268 established. The offset between the frame pointer and the stack 4269 pointer is calculated relative to the value of the stack pointer 4270 at the end of the function prologue, and moving instructions that 4271 access the stack via the frame pointer between the instructions 4272 that decrement the stack pointer could result in accessing the 4273 register window save area, which is volatile. */ 4274 emit_insn (gen_frame_blockage ()); 4275 } 4276 else 4277 { 4278 rtx reg = gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 1); 4279 emit_move_insn (reg, GEN_INT (-actual_fsize)); 4280 insn = emit_insn (gen_save_register_window (reg)); 4281 } 4282 4283 RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P (insn) = 1; 4284 for (i=0; i < XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn), 0); i++) 4285 RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i)) = 1; 4286 } 4287 4288 if (num_gfregs) 4289 emit_save_or_restore_regs (SORR_SAVE); 4290 4291 /* Load the GOT register if needed. */ 4292 if (crtl->uses_pic_offset_table) 4293 load_got_register (); 4294} 4295 4296/* This function generates the assembly code for function entry, which boils 4297 down to emitting the necessary .register directives. */ 4298 4299static void 4300sparc_asm_function_prologue (FILE *file, HOST_WIDE_INT size ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED) 4301{ 4302 /* Check that the assumption we made in sparc_expand_prologue is valid. */ 4303 gcc_assert (sparc_leaf_function_p == current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs); 4304 4305 sparc_output_scratch_registers (file); 4306} 4307 4308/* Expand the function epilogue, either normal or part of a sibcall. 4309 We emit all the instructions except the return or the call. */ 4310 4311void 4312sparc_expand_epilogue (void) 4313{ 4314 if (num_gfregs) 4315 emit_save_or_restore_regs (SORR_RESTORE); 4316 4317 if (actual_fsize == 0) 4318 /* do nothing. */ ; 4319 else if (sparc_leaf_function_p) 4320 { 4321 if (actual_fsize <= 4096) 4322 emit_insn (gen_stack_pointer_dec (GEN_INT (- actual_fsize))); 4323 else if (actual_fsize <= 8192) 4324 { 4325 emit_insn (gen_stack_pointer_dec (GEN_INT (-4096))); 4326 emit_insn (gen_stack_pointer_dec (GEN_INT (4096 - actual_fsize))); 4327 } 4328 else 4329 { 4330 rtx reg = gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 1); 4331 emit_move_insn (reg, GEN_INT (-actual_fsize)); 4332 emit_insn (gen_stack_pointer_dec (reg)); 4333 } 4334 } 4335} 4336 4337/* Return true if it is appropriate to emit `return' instructions in the 4338 body of a function. */ 4339 4340bool 4341sparc_can_use_return_insn_p (void) 4342{ 4343 return sparc_prologue_data_valid_p 4344 && num_gfregs == 0 4345 && (actual_fsize == 0 || !sparc_leaf_function_p); 4346} 4347 4348/* This function generates the assembly code for function exit. */ 4349 4350static void 4351sparc_asm_function_epilogue (FILE *file, HOST_WIDE_INT size ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED) 4352{ 4353 /* If code does not drop into the epilogue, we have to still output 4354 a dummy nop for the sake of sane backtraces. Otherwise, if the 4355 last two instructions of a function were "call foo; dslot;" this 4356 can make the return PC of foo (i.e. address of call instruction 4357 plus 8) point to the first instruction in the next function. */ 4358 4359 rtx insn, last_real_insn; 4360 4361 insn = get_last_insn (); 4362 4363 last_real_insn = prev_real_insn (insn); 4364 if (last_real_insn 4365 && GET_CODE (last_real_insn) == INSN 4366 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (last_real_insn)) == SEQUENCE) 4367 last_real_insn = XVECEXP (PATTERN (last_real_insn), 0, 0); 4368 4369 if (last_real_insn && GET_CODE (last_real_insn) == CALL_INSN) 4370 fputs("\tnop\n", file); 4371 4372 sparc_output_deferred_case_vectors (); 4373} 4374 4375/* Output a 'restore' instruction. */ 4376 4377static void 4378output_restore (rtx pat) 4379{ 4380 rtx operands[3]; 4381 4382 if (! pat) 4383 { 4384 fputs ("\t restore\n", asm_out_file); 4385 return; 4386 } 4387 4388 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (pat) == SET); 4389 4390 operands[0] = SET_DEST (pat); 4391 pat = SET_SRC (pat); 4392 4393 switch (GET_CODE (pat)) 4394 { 4395 case PLUS: 4396 operands[1] = XEXP (pat, 0); 4397 operands[2] = XEXP (pat, 1); 4398 output_asm_insn (" restore %r1, %2, %Y0", operands); 4399 break; 4400 case LO_SUM: 4401 operands[1] = XEXP (pat, 0); 4402 operands[2] = XEXP (pat, 1); 4403 output_asm_insn (" restore %r1, %%lo(%a2), %Y0", operands); 4404 break; 4405 case ASHIFT: 4406 operands[1] = XEXP (pat, 0); 4407 gcc_assert (XEXP (pat, 1) == const1_rtx); 4408 output_asm_insn (" restore %r1, %r1, %Y0", operands); 4409 break; 4410 default: 4411 operands[1] = pat; 4412 output_asm_insn (" restore %%g0, %1, %Y0", operands); 4413 break; 4414 } 4415} 4416 4417/* Output a return. */ 4418 4419const char * 4420output_return (rtx insn) 4421{ 4422 if (sparc_leaf_function_p) 4423 { 4424 /* This is a leaf function so we don't have to bother restoring the 4425 register window, which frees us from dealing with the convoluted 4426 semantics of restore/return. We simply output the jump to the 4427 return address and the insn in the delay slot (if any). */ 4428 4429 gcc_assert (! crtl->calls_eh_return); 4430 4431 return "jmp\t%%o7+%)%#"; 4432 } 4433 else 4434 { 4435 /* This is a regular function so we have to restore the register window. 4436 We may have a pending insn for the delay slot, which will be either 4437 combined with the 'restore' instruction or put in the delay slot of 4438 the 'return' instruction. */ 4439 4440 if (crtl->calls_eh_return) 4441 { 4442 /* If the function uses __builtin_eh_return, the eh_return 4443 machinery occupies the delay slot. */ 4444 gcc_assert (! final_sequence); 4445 4446 if (flag_delayed_branch) 4447 { 4448 if (TARGET_V9) 4449 fputs ("\treturn\t%i7+8\n", asm_out_file); 4450 else 4451 fputs ("\trestore\n\tjmp\t%o7+8\n", asm_out_file); 4452 4453 fputs ("\t add\t%sp, %g1, %sp\n", asm_out_file); 4454 } 4455 else 4456 { 4457 fputs ("\trestore\n\tadd\t%sp, %g1, %sp\n", asm_out_file); 4458 fputs ("\tjmp\t%o7+8\n\t nop\n", asm_out_file); 4459 } 4460 } 4461 else if (final_sequence) 4462 { 4463 rtx delay, pat; 4464 4465 delay = NEXT_INSN (insn); 4466 gcc_assert (delay); 4467 4468 pat = PATTERN (delay); 4469 4470 if (TARGET_V9 && ! epilogue_renumber (&pat, 1)) 4471 { 4472 epilogue_renumber (&pat, 0); 4473 return "return\t%%i7+%)%#"; 4474 } 4475 else 4476 { 4477 output_asm_insn ("jmp\t%%i7+%)", NULL); 4478 output_restore (pat); 4479 PATTERN (delay) = gen_blockage (); 4480 INSN_CODE (delay) = -1; 4481 } 4482 } 4483 else 4484 { 4485 /* The delay slot is empty. */ 4486 if (TARGET_V9) 4487 return "return\t%%i7+%)\n\t nop"; 4488 else if (flag_delayed_branch) 4489 return "jmp\t%%i7+%)\n\t restore"; 4490 else 4491 return "restore\n\tjmp\t%%o7+%)\n\t nop"; 4492 } 4493 } 4494 4495 return ""; 4496} 4497 4498/* Output a sibling call. */ 4499 4500const char * 4501output_sibcall (rtx insn, rtx call_operand) 4502{ 4503 rtx operands[1]; 4504 4505 gcc_assert (flag_delayed_branch); 4506 4507 operands[0] = call_operand; 4508 4509 if (sparc_leaf_function_p) 4510 { 4511 /* This is a leaf function so we don't have to bother restoring the 4512 register window. We simply output the jump to the function and 4513 the insn in the delay slot (if any). */ 4514 4515 gcc_assert (!(LEAF_SIBCALL_SLOT_RESERVED_P && final_sequence)); 4516 4517 if (final_sequence) 4518 output_asm_insn ("sethi\t%%hi(%a0), %%g1\n\tjmp\t%%g1 + %%lo(%a0)%#", 4519 operands); 4520 else 4521 /* Use or with rs2 %%g0 instead of mov, so that as/ld can optimize 4522 it into branch if possible. */ 4523 output_asm_insn ("or\t%%o7, %%g0, %%g1\n\tcall\t%a0, 0\n\t or\t%%g1, %%g0, %%o7", 4524 operands); 4525 } 4526 else 4527 { 4528 /* This is a regular function so we have to restore the register window. 4529 We may have a pending insn for the delay slot, which will be combined 4530 with the 'restore' instruction. */ 4531 4532 output_asm_insn ("call\t%a0, 0", operands); 4533 4534 if (final_sequence) 4535 { 4536 rtx delay = NEXT_INSN (insn); 4537 gcc_assert (delay); 4538 4539 output_restore (PATTERN (delay)); 4540 4541 PATTERN (delay) = gen_blockage (); 4542 INSN_CODE (delay) = -1; 4543 } 4544 else 4545 output_restore (NULL_RTX); 4546 } 4547 4548 return ""; 4549} 4550 4551/* Functions for handling argument passing. 4552 4553 For 32-bit, the first 6 args are normally in registers and the rest are 4554 pushed. Any arg that starts within the first 6 words is at least 4555 partially passed in a register unless its data type forbids. 4556 4557 For 64-bit, the argument registers are laid out as an array of 16 elements 4558 and arguments are added sequentially. The first 6 int args and up to the 4559 first 16 fp args (depending on size) are passed in regs. 4560 4561 Slot Stack Integral Float Float in structure Double Long Double 4562 ---- ----- -------- ----- ------------------ ------ ----------- 4563 15 [SP+248] %f31 %f30,%f31 %d30 4564 14 [SP+240] %f29 %f28,%f29 %d28 %q28 4565 13 [SP+232] %f27 %f26,%f27 %d26 4566 12 [SP+224] %f25 %f24,%f25 %d24 %q24 4567 11 [SP+216] %f23 %f22,%f23 %d22 4568 10 [SP+208] %f21 %f20,%f21 %d20 %q20 4569 9 [SP+200] %f19 %f18,%f19 %d18 4570 8 [SP+192] %f17 %f16,%f17 %d16 %q16 4571 7 [SP+184] %f15 %f14,%f15 %d14 4572 6 [SP+176] %f13 %f12,%f13 %d12 %q12 4573 5 [SP+168] %o5 %f11 %f10,%f11 %d10 4574 4 [SP+160] %o4 %f9 %f8,%f9 %d8 %q8 4575 3 [SP+152] %o3 %f7 %f6,%f7 %d6 4576 2 [SP+144] %o2 %f5 %f4,%f5 %d4 %q4 4577 1 [SP+136] %o1 %f3 %f2,%f3 %d2 4578 0 [SP+128] %o0 %f1 %f0,%f1 %d0 %q0 4579 4580 Here SP = %sp if -mno-stack-bias or %sp+stack_bias otherwise. 4581 4582 Integral arguments are always passed as 64-bit quantities appropriately 4583 extended. 4584 4585 Passing of floating point values is handled as follows. 4586 If a prototype is in scope: 4587 If the value is in a named argument (i.e. not a stdarg function or a 4588 value not part of the `...') then the value is passed in the appropriate 4589 fp reg. 4590 If the value is part of the `...' and is passed in one of the first 6 4591 slots then the value is passed in the appropriate int reg. 4592 If the value is part of the `...' and is not passed in one of the first 6 4593 slots then the value is passed in memory. 4594 If a prototype is not in scope: 4595 If the value is one of the first 6 arguments the value is passed in the 4596 appropriate integer reg and the appropriate fp reg. 4597 If the value is not one of the first 6 arguments the value is passed in 4598 the appropriate fp reg and in memory. 4599 4600 4601 Summary of the calling conventions implemented by GCC on the SPARC: 4602 4603 32-bit ABI: 4604 size argument return value 4605 4606 small integer <4 int. reg. int. reg. 4607 word 4 int. reg. int. reg. 4608 double word 8 int. reg. int. reg. 4609 4610 _Complex small integer <8 int. reg. int. reg. 4611 _Complex word 8 int. reg. int. reg. 4612 _Complex double word 16 memory int. reg. 4613 4614 vector integer <=8 int. reg. FP reg. 4615 vector integer >8 memory memory 4616 4617 float 4 int. reg. FP reg. 4618 double 8 int. reg. FP reg. 4619 long double 16 memory memory 4620 4621 _Complex float 8 memory FP reg. 4622 _Complex double 16 memory FP reg. 4623 _Complex long double 32 memory FP reg. 4624 4625 vector float any memory memory 4626 4627 aggregate any memory memory 4628 4629 4630 4631 64-bit ABI: 4632 size argument return value 4633 4634 small integer <8 int. reg. int. reg. 4635 word 8 int. reg. int. reg. 4636 double word 16 int. reg. int. reg. 4637 4638 _Complex small integer <16 int. reg. int. reg. 4639 _Complex word 16 int. reg. int. reg. 4640 _Complex double word 32 memory int. reg. 4641 4642 vector integer <=16 FP reg. FP reg. 4643 vector integer 16<s<=32 memory FP reg. 4644 vector integer >32 memory memory 4645 4646 float 4 FP reg. FP reg. 4647 double 8 FP reg. FP reg. 4648 long double 16 FP reg. FP reg. 4649 4650 _Complex float 8 FP reg. FP reg. 4651 _Complex double 16 FP reg. FP reg. 4652 _Complex long double 32 memory FP reg. 4653 4654 vector float <=16 FP reg. FP reg. 4655 vector float 16<s<=32 memory FP reg. 4656 vector float >32 memory memory 4657 4658 aggregate <=16 reg. reg. 4659 aggregate 16<s<=32 memory reg. 4660 aggregate >32 memory memory 4661 4662 4663 4664Note #1: complex floating-point types follow the extended SPARC ABIs as 4665implemented by the Sun compiler. 4666 4667Note #2: integral vector types follow the scalar floating-point types 4668conventions to match what is implemented by the Sun VIS SDK. 4669 4670Note #3: floating-point vector types follow the aggregate types 4671conventions. */ 4672 4673 4674/* Maximum number of int regs for args. */ 4675#define SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX 6 4676/* Maximum number of fp regs for args. */ 4677#define SPARC_FP_ARG_MAX 16 4678 4679#define ROUND_ADVANCE(SIZE) (((SIZE) + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) / UNITS_PER_WORD) 4680 4681/* Handle the INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS macro. 4682 Initialize a variable CUM of type CUMULATIVE_ARGS 4683 for a call to a function whose data type is FNTYPE. 4684 For a library call, FNTYPE is 0. */ 4685 4686void 4687init_cumulative_args (struct sparc_args *cum, tree fntype, 4688 rtx libname ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, 4689 tree fndecl ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED) 4690{ 4691 cum->words = 0; 4692 cum->prototype_p = fntype && TYPE_ARG_TYPES (fntype); 4693 cum->libcall_p = fntype == 0; 4694} 4695 4696/* Handle the TARGET_PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES target hook. 4697 When a prototype says `char' or `short', really pass an `int'. */ 4698 4699static bool 4700sparc_promote_prototypes (const_tree fntype ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED) 4701{ 4702 return TARGET_ARCH32 ? true : false; 4703} 4704 4705/* Handle promotion of pointer and integer arguments. */ 4706 4707static enum machine_mode 4708sparc_promote_function_mode (const_tree type ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, 4709 enum machine_mode mode, 4710 int *punsignedp ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, 4711 const_tree fntype ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, 4712 int for_return ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED) 4713{ 4714 if (POINTER_TYPE_P (type)) 4715 { 4716 *punsignedp = POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED; 4717 return Pmode; 4718 } 4719 4720 /* For TARGET_ARCH64 we need this, as we don't have instructions 4721 for arithmetic operations which do zero/sign extension at the same time, 4722 so without this we end up with a srl/sra after every assignment to an 4723 user variable, which means very very bad code. */ 4724 if (TARGET_ARCH64 4725 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT 4726 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < UNITS_PER_WORD) 4727 return word_mode; 4728 4729 return mode; 4730} 4731 4732/* Handle the TARGET_STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING target hook. */ 4733 4734static bool 4735sparc_strict_argument_naming (CUMULATIVE_ARGS *ca ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED) 4736{ 4737 return TARGET_ARCH64 ? true : false; 4738} 4739 4740/* Scan the record type TYPE and return the following predicates: 4741 - INTREGS_P: the record contains at least one field or sub-field 4742 that is eligible for promotion in integer registers. 4743 - FP_REGS_P: the record contains at least one field or sub-field 4744 that is eligible for promotion in floating-point registers. 4745 - PACKED_P: the record contains at least one field that is packed. 4746 4747 Sub-fields are not taken into account for the PACKED_P predicate. */ 4748 4749static void 4750scan_record_type (tree type, int *intregs_p, int *fpregs_p, int *packed_p) 4751{ 4752 tree field; 4753 4754 for (field = TYPE_FIELDS (type); field; field = TREE_CHAIN (field)) 4755 { 4756 if (TREE_CODE (field) == FIELD_DECL) 4757 { 4758 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == RECORD_TYPE) 4759 scan_record_type (TREE_TYPE (field), intregs_p, fpregs_p, 0); 4760 else if ((FLOAT_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (field)) 4761 || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == VECTOR_TYPE) 4762 && TARGET_FPU) 4763 *fpregs_p = 1; 4764 else 4765 *intregs_p = 1; 4766 4767 if (packed_p && DECL_PACKED (field)) 4768 *packed_p = 1; 4769 } 4770 } 4771} 4772 4773/* Compute the slot number to pass an argument in. 4774 Return the slot number or -1 if passing on the stack. 4775 4776 CUM is a variable of type CUMULATIVE_ARGS which gives info about 4777 the preceding args and about the function being called. 4778 MODE is the argument's machine mode. 4779 TYPE is the data type of the argument (as a tree). 4780 This is null for libcalls where that information may 4781 not be available. 4782 NAMED is nonzero if this argument is a named parameter 4783 (otherwise it is an extra parameter matching an ellipsis). 4784 INCOMING_P is zero for FUNCTION_ARG, nonzero for FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG. 4785 *PREGNO records the register number to use if scalar type. 4786 *PPADDING records the amount of padding needed in words. */ 4787 4788static int 4789function_arg_slotno (const struct sparc_args *cum, enum machine_mode mode, 4790 tree type, int named, int incoming_p, 4791 int *pregno, int *ppadding) 4792{ 4793 int regbase = (incoming_p 4794 ? SPARC_INCOMING_INT_ARG_FIRST 4795 : SPARC_OUTGOING_INT_ARG_FIRST); 4796 int slotno = cum->words; 4797 enum mode_class mclass; 4798 int regno; 4799 4800 *ppadding = 0; 4801 4802 if (type && TREE_ADDRESSABLE (type)) 4803 return -1; 4804 4805 if (TARGET_ARCH32 4806 && mode == BLKmode 4807 && type 4808 && TYPE_ALIGN (type) % PARM_BOUNDARY != 0) 4809 return -1; 4810 4811 /* For SPARC64, objects requiring 16-byte alignment get it. */ 4812 if (TARGET_ARCH64 4813 && (type ? TYPE_ALIGN (type) : GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode)) >= 128 4814 && (slotno & 1) != 0) 4815 slotno++, *ppadding = 1; 4816 4817 mclass = GET_MODE_CLASS (mode); 4818 if (type && TREE_CODE (type) == VECTOR_TYPE) 4819 { 4820 /* Vector types deserve special treatment because they are 4821 polymorphic wrt their mode, depending upon whether VIS 4822 instructions are enabled. */ 4823 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (type)) == REAL_TYPE) 4824 { 4825 /* The SPARC port defines no floating-point vector modes. */ 4826 gcc_assert (mode == BLKmode); 4827 } 4828 else 4829 { 4830 /* Integral vector types should either have a vector 4831 mode or an integral mode, because we are guaranteed 4832 by pass_by_reference that their size is not greater 4833 than 16 bytes and TImode is 16-byte wide. */ 4834 gcc_assert (mode != BLKmode); 4835 4836 /* Vector integers are handled like floats according to 4837 the Sun VIS SDK. */ 4838 mclass = MODE_FLOAT; 4839 } 4840 } 4841 4842 switch (mclass) 4843 { 4844 case MODE_FLOAT: 4845 case MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT: 4846 case MODE_VECTOR_INT: 4847 if (TARGET_ARCH64 && TARGET_FPU && named) 4848 { 4849 if (slotno >= SPARC_FP_ARG_MAX) 4850 return -1; 4851 regno = SPARC_FP_ARG_FIRST + slotno * 2; 4852 /* Arguments filling only one single FP register are 4853 right-justified in the outer double FP register. */ 4854 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) <= 4) 4855 regno++; 4856 break; 4857 } 4858 /* fallthrough */ 4859 4860 case MODE_INT: 4861 case MODE_COMPLEX_INT: 4862 if (slotno >= SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX) 4863 return -1; 4864 regno = regbase + slotno; 4865 break; 4866 4867 case MODE_RANDOM: 4868 if (mode == VOIDmode) 4869 /* MODE is VOIDmode when generating the actual call. */ 4870 return -1; 4871 4872 gcc_assert (mode == BLKmode); 4873 4874 if (TARGET_ARCH32 4875 || !type 4876 || (TREE_CODE (type) != VECTOR_TYPE 4877 && TREE_CODE (type) != RECORD_TYPE)) 4878 { 4879 if (slotno >= SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX) 4880 return -1; 4881 regno = regbase + slotno; 4882 } 4883 else /* TARGET_ARCH64 && type */ 4884 { 4885 int intregs_p = 0, fpregs_p = 0, packed_p = 0; 4886 4887 /* First see what kinds of registers we would need. */ 4888 if (TREE_CODE (type) == VECTOR_TYPE) 4889 fpregs_p = 1; 4890 else 4891 scan_record_type (type, &intregs_p, &fpregs_p, &packed_p); 4892 4893 /* The ABI obviously doesn't specify how packed structures 4894 are passed. These are defined to be passed in int regs 4895 if possible, otherwise memory. */ 4896 if (packed_p || !named) 4897 fpregs_p = 0, intregs_p = 1; 4898 4899 /* If all arg slots are filled, then must pass on stack. */ 4900 if (fpregs_p && slotno >= SPARC_FP_ARG_MAX) 4901 return -1; 4902 4903 /* If there are only int args and all int arg slots are filled, 4904 then must pass on stack. */ 4905 if (!fpregs_p && intregs_p && slotno >= SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX) 4906 return -1; 4907 4908 /* Note that even if all int arg slots are filled, fp members may 4909 still be passed in regs if such regs are available. 4910 *PREGNO isn't set because there may be more than one, it's up 4911 to the caller to compute them. */ 4912 return slotno; 4913 } 4914 break; 4915 4916 default : 4917 gcc_unreachable (); 4918 } 4919 4920 *pregno = regno; 4921 return slotno; 4922} 4923 4924/* Handle recursive register counting for structure field layout. */ 4925 4926struct function_arg_record_value_parms 4927{ 4928 rtx ret; /* return expression being built. */ 4929 int slotno; /* slot number of the argument. */ 4930 int named; /* whether the argument is named. */ 4931 int regbase; /* regno of the base register. */ 4932 int stack; /* 1 if part of the argument is on the stack. */ 4933 int intoffset; /* offset of the first pending integer field. */ 4934 unsigned int nregs; /* number of words passed in registers. */ 4935}; 4936 4937static void function_arg_record_value_3 4938 (HOST_WIDE_INT, struct function_arg_record_value_parms *); 4939static void function_arg_record_value_2 4940 (const_tree, HOST_WIDE_INT, struct function_arg_record_value_parms *, bool); 4941static void function_arg_record_value_1 4942 (const_tree, HOST_WIDE_INT, struct function_arg_record_value_parms *, bool); 4943static rtx function_arg_record_value (const_tree, enum machine_mode, int, int, int); 4944static rtx function_arg_union_value (int, enum machine_mode, int, int); 4945 4946/* A subroutine of function_arg_record_value. Traverse the structure 4947 recursively and determine how many registers will be required. */ 4948 4949static void 4950function_arg_record_value_1 (const_tree type, HOST_WIDE_INT startbitpos, 4951 struct function_arg_record_value_parms *parms, 4952 bool packed_p) 4953{ 4954 tree field; 4955 4956 /* We need to compute how many registers are needed so we can 4957 allocate the PARALLEL but before we can do that we need to know 4958 whether there are any packed fields. The ABI obviously doesn't 4959 specify how structures are passed in this case, so they are 4960 defined to be passed in int regs if possible, otherwise memory, 4961 regardless of whether there are fp values present. */ 4962 4963 if (! packed_p) 4964 for (field = TYPE_FIELDS (type); field; field = TREE_CHAIN (field)) 4965 { 4966 if (TREE_CODE (field) == FIELD_DECL && DECL_PACKED (field)) 4967 { 4968 packed_p = true; 4969 break; 4970 } 4971 } 4972 4973 /* Compute how many registers we need. */ 4974 for (field = TYPE_FIELDS (type); field; field = TREE_CHAIN (field)) 4975 { 4976 if (TREE_CODE (field) == FIELD_DECL) 4977 { 4978 HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos = startbitpos; 4979 4980 if (DECL_SIZE (field) != 0) 4981 { 4982 if (integer_zerop (DECL_SIZE (field))) 4983 continue; 4984 4985 if (host_integerp (bit_position (field), 1)) 4986 bitpos += int_bit_position (field); 4987 } 4988 4989 /* ??? FIXME: else assume zero offset. */ 4990 4991 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == RECORD_TYPE) 4992 function_arg_record_value_1 (TREE_TYPE (field), 4993 bitpos, 4994 parms, 4995 packed_p); 4996 else if ((FLOAT_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (field)) 4997 || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == VECTOR_TYPE) 4998 && TARGET_FPU 4999 && parms->named 5000 && ! packed_p) 5001 { 5002 if (parms->intoffset != -1) 5003 { 5004 unsigned int startbit, endbit; 5005 int intslots, this_slotno; 5006 5007 startbit = parms->intoffset & -BITS_PER_WORD; 5008 endbit = (bitpos + BITS_PER_WORD - 1) & -BITS_PER_WORD; 5009 5010 intslots = (endbit - startbit) / BITS_PER_WORD; 5011 this_slotno = parms->slotno + parms->intoffset 5012 / BITS_PER_WORD; 5013 5014 if (intslots > 0 && intslots > SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - this_slotno) 5015 { 5016 intslots = MAX (0, SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - this_slotno); 5017 /* We need to pass this field on the stack. */ 5018 parms->stack = 1; 5019 } 5020 5021 parms->nregs += intslots; 5022 parms->intoffset = -1; 5023 } 5024 5025 /* There's no need to check this_slotno < SPARC_FP_ARG MAX. 5026 If it wasn't true we wouldn't be here. */ 5027 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == VECTOR_TYPE 5028 && DECL_MODE (field) == BLKmode) 5029 parms->nregs += TYPE_VECTOR_SUBPARTS (TREE_TYPE (field)); 5030 else if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == COMPLEX_TYPE) 5031 parms->nregs += 2; 5032 else 5033 parms->nregs += 1; 5034 } 5035 else 5036 { 5037 if (parms->intoffset == -1) 5038 parms->intoffset = bitpos; 5039 } 5040 } 5041 } 5042} 5043 5044/* A subroutine of function_arg_record_value. Assign the bits of the 5045 structure between parms->intoffset and bitpos to integer registers. */ 5046 5047static void 5048function_arg_record_value_3 (HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos, 5049 struct function_arg_record_value_parms *parms) 5050{ 5051 enum machine_mode mode; 5052 unsigned int regno; 5053 unsigned int startbit, endbit; 5054 int this_slotno, intslots, intoffset; 5055 rtx reg; 5056 5057 if (parms->intoffset == -1) 5058 return; 5059 5060 intoffset = parms->intoffset; 5061 parms->intoffset = -1; 5062 5063 startbit = intoffset & -BITS_PER_WORD; 5064 endbit = (bitpos + BITS_PER_WORD - 1) & -BITS_PER_WORD; 5065 intslots = (endbit - startbit) / BITS_PER_WORD; 5066 this_slotno = parms->slotno + intoffset / BITS_PER_WORD; 5067 5068 intslots = MIN (intslots, SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - this_slotno); 5069 if (intslots <= 0) 5070 return; 5071 5072 /* If this is the trailing part of a word, only load that much into 5073 the register. Otherwise load the whole register. Note that in 5074 the latter case we may pick up unwanted bits. It's not a problem 5075 at the moment but may wish to revisit. */ 5076 5077 if (intoffset % BITS_PER_WORD != 0) 5078 mode = smallest_mode_for_size (BITS_PER_WORD - intoffset % BITS_PER_WORD, 5079 MODE_INT); 5080 else 5081 mode = word_mode; 5082 5083 intoffset /= BITS_PER_UNIT; 5084 do 5085 { 5086 regno = parms->regbase + this_slotno; 5087 reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno); 5088 XVECEXP (parms->ret, 0, parms->stack + parms->nregs) 5089 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, reg, GEN_INT (intoffset)); 5090 5091 this_slotno += 1; 5092 intoffset = (intoffset | (UNITS_PER_WORD-1)) + 1; 5093 mode = word_mode; 5094 parms->nregs += 1; 5095 intslots -= 1; 5096 } 5097 while (intslots > 0); 5098} 5099 5100/* A subroutine of function_arg_record_value. Traverse the structure 5101 recursively and assign bits to floating point registers. Track which 5102 bits in between need integer registers; invoke function_arg_record_value_3 5103 to make that happen. */ 5104 5105static void 5106function_arg_record_value_2 (const_tree type, HOST_WIDE_INT startbitpos, 5107 struct function_arg_record_value_parms *parms, 5108 bool packed_p) 5109{ 5110 tree field; 5111 5112 if (! packed_p) 5113 for (field = TYPE_FIELDS (type); field; field = TREE_CHAIN (field)) 5114 { 5115 if (TREE_CODE (field) == FIELD_DECL && DECL_PACKED (field)) 5116 { 5117 packed_p = true; 5118 break; 5119 } 5120 } 5121 5122 for (field = TYPE_FIELDS (type); field; field = TREE_CHAIN (field)) 5123 { 5124 if (TREE_CODE (field) == FIELD_DECL) 5125 { 5126 HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos = startbitpos; 5127 5128 if (DECL_SIZE (field) != 0) 5129 { 5130 if (integer_zerop (DECL_SIZE (field))) 5131 continue; 5132 5133 if (host_integerp (bit_position (field), 1)) 5134 bitpos += int_bit_position (field); 5135 } 5136 5137 /* ??? FIXME: else assume zero offset. */ 5138 5139 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == RECORD_TYPE) 5140 function_arg_record_value_2 (TREE_TYPE (field), 5141 bitpos, 5142 parms, 5143 packed_p); 5144 else if ((FLOAT_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (field)) 5145 || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == VECTOR_TYPE) 5146 && TARGET_FPU 5147 && parms->named 5148 && ! packed_p) 5149 { 5150 int this_slotno = parms->slotno + bitpos / BITS_PER_WORD; 5151 int regno, nregs, pos; 5152 enum machine_mode mode = DECL_MODE (field); 5153 rtx reg; 5154 5155 function_arg_record_value_3 (bitpos, parms); 5156 5157 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == VECTOR_TYPE 5158 && mode == BLKmode) 5159 { 5160 mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (field))); 5161 nregs = TYPE_VECTOR_SUBPARTS (TREE_TYPE (field)); 5162 } 5163 else if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == COMPLEX_TYPE) 5164 { 5165 mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (field))); 5166 nregs = 2; 5167 } 5168 else 5169 nregs = 1; 5170 5171 regno = SPARC_FP_ARG_FIRST + this_slotno * 2; 5172 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) <= 4 && (bitpos & 32) != 0) 5173 regno++; 5174 reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno); 5175 pos = bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT; 5176 XVECEXP (parms->ret, 0, parms->stack + parms->nregs) 5177 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, reg, GEN_INT (pos)); 5178 parms->nregs += 1; 5179 while (--nregs > 0) 5180 { 5181 regno += GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) / 4; 5182 reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno); 5183 pos += GET_MODE_SIZE (mode); 5184 XVECEXP (parms->ret, 0, parms->stack + parms->nregs) 5185 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, reg, GEN_INT (pos)); 5186 parms->nregs += 1; 5187 } 5188 } 5189 else 5190 { 5191 if (parms->intoffset == -1) 5192 parms->intoffset = bitpos; 5193 } 5194 } 5195 } 5196} 5197 5198/* Used by function_arg and function_value to implement the complex 5199 conventions of the 64-bit ABI for passing and returning structures. 5200 Return an expression valid as a return value for the two macros 5201 FUNCTION_ARG and FUNCTION_VALUE. 5202 5203 TYPE is the data type of the argument (as a tree). 5204 This is null for libcalls where that information may 5205 not be available. 5206 MODE is the argument's machine mode. 5207 SLOTNO is the index number of the argument's slot in the parameter array. 5208 NAMED is nonzero if this argument is a named parameter 5209 (otherwise it is an extra parameter matching an ellipsis). 5210 REGBASE is the regno of the base register for the parameter array. */ 5211 5212static rtx 5213function_arg_record_value (const_tree type, enum machine_mode mode, 5214 int slotno, int named, int regbase) 5215{ 5216 HOST_WIDE_INT typesize = int_size_in_bytes (type); 5217 struct function_arg_record_value_parms parms; 5218 unsigned int nregs; 5219 5220 parms.ret = NULL_RTX; 5221 parms.slotno = slotno; 5222 parms.named = named; 5223 parms.regbase = regbase; 5224 parms.stack = 0; 5225 5226 /* Compute how many registers we need. */ 5227 parms.nregs = 0; 5228 parms.intoffset = 0; 5229 function_arg_record_value_1 (type, 0, &parms, false); 5230 5231 /* Take into account pending integer fields. */ 5232 if (parms.intoffset != -1) 5233 { 5234 unsigned int startbit, endbit; 5235 int intslots, this_slotno; 5236 5237 startbit = parms.intoffset & -BITS_PER_WORD; 5238 endbit = (typesize*BITS_PER_UNIT + BITS_PER_WORD - 1) & -BITS_PER_WORD; 5239 intslots = (endbit - startbit) / BITS_PER_WORD; 5240 this_slotno = slotno + parms.intoffset / BITS_PER_WORD; 5241 5242 if (intslots > 0 && intslots > SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - this_slotno) 5243 { 5244 intslots = MAX (0, SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - this_slotno); 5245 /* We need to pass this field on the stack. */ 5246 parms.stack = 1; 5247 } 5248 5249 parms.nregs += intslots; 5250 } 5251 nregs = parms.nregs; 5252 5253 /* Allocate the vector and handle some annoying special cases. */ 5254 if (nregs == 0) 5255 { 5256 /* ??? Empty structure has no value? Duh? */ 5257 if (typesize <= 0) 5258 { 5259 /* Though there's nothing really to store, return a word register 5260 anyway so the rest of gcc doesn't go nuts. Returning a PARALLEL 5261 leads to breakage due to the fact that there are zero bytes to 5262 load. */ 5263 return gen_rtx_REG (mode, regbase); 5264 } 5265 else 5266 { 5267 /* ??? C++ has structures with no fields, and yet a size. Give up 5268 for now and pass everything back in integer registers. */ 5269 nregs = (typesize + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) / UNITS_PER_WORD; 5270 } 5271 if (nregs + slotno > SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX) 5272 nregs = SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - slotno; 5273 } 5274 gcc_assert (nregs != 0); 5275 5276 parms.ret = gen_rtx_PARALLEL (mode, rtvec_alloc (parms.stack + nregs)); 5277 5278 /* If at least one field must be passed on the stack, generate 5279 (parallel [(expr_list (nil) ...) ...]) so that all fields will 5280 also be passed on the stack. We can't do much better because the 5281 semantics of TARGET_ARG_PARTIAL_BYTES doesn't handle the case 5282 of structures for which the fields passed exclusively in registers 5283 are not at the beginning of the structure. */ 5284 if (parms.stack) 5285 XVECEXP (parms.ret, 0, 0) 5286 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, NULL_RTX, const0_rtx); 5287 5288 /* Fill in the entries. */ 5289 parms.nregs = 0; 5290 parms.intoffset = 0; 5291 function_arg_record_value_2 (type, 0, &parms, false); 5292 function_arg_record_value_3 (typesize * BITS_PER_UNIT, &parms); 5293 5294 gcc_assert (parms.nregs == nregs); 5295 5296 return parms.ret; 5297} 5298 5299/* Used by function_arg and function_value to implement the conventions 5300 of the 64-bit ABI for passing and returning unions. 5301 Return an expression valid as a return value for the two macros 5302 FUNCTION_ARG and FUNCTION_VALUE. 5303 5304 SIZE is the size in bytes of the union. 5305 MODE is the argument's machine mode. 5306 REGNO is the hard register the union will be passed in. */ 5307 5308static rtx 5309function_arg_union_value (int size, enum machine_mode mode, int slotno, 5310 int regno) 5311{ 5312 int nwords = ROUND_ADVANCE (size), i; 5313 rtx regs; 5314 5315 /* See comment in previous function for empty structures. */ 5316 if (nwords == 0) 5317 return gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno); 5318 5319 if (slotno == SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - 1) 5320 nwords = 1; 5321 5322 regs = gen_rtx_PARALLEL (mode, rtvec_alloc (nwords)); 5323 5324 for (i = 0; i < nwords; i++) 5325 { 5326 /* Unions are passed left-justified. */ 5327 XVECEXP (regs, 0, i) 5328 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, 5329 gen_rtx_REG (word_mode, regno), 5330 GEN_INT (UNITS_PER_WORD * i)); 5331 regno++; 5332 } 5333 5334 return regs; 5335} 5336 5337/* Used by function_arg and function_value to implement the conventions 5338 for passing and returning large (BLKmode) vectors. 5339 Return an expression valid as a return value for the two macros 5340 FUNCTION_ARG and FUNCTION_VALUE. 5341 5342 SIZE is the size in bytes of the vector (at least 8 bytes). 5343 REGNO is the FP hard register the vector will be passed in. */ 5344 5345static rtx 5346function_arg_vector_value (int size, int regno) 5347{ 5348 int i, nregs = size / 8; 5349 rtx regs; 5350 5351 regs = gen_rtx_PARALLEL (BLKmode, rtvec_alloc (nregs)); 5352 5353 for (i = 0; i < nregs; i++) 5354 { 5355 XVECEXP (regs, 0, i) 5356 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, 5357 gen_rtx_REG (DImode, regno + 2*i), 5358 GEN_INT (i*8)); 5359 } 5360 5361 return regs; 5362} 5363 5364/* Handle the FUNCTION_ARG macro. 5365 Determine where to put an argument to a function. 5366 Value is zero to push the argument on the stack, 5367 or a hard register in which to store the argument. 5368 5369 CUM is a variable of type CUMULATIVE_ARGS which gives info about 5370 the preceding args and about the function being called. 5371 MODE is the argument's machine mode. 5372 TYPE is the data type of the argument (as a tree). 5373 This is null for libcalls where that information may 5374 not be available. 5375 NAMED is nonzero if this argument is a named parameter 5376 (otherwise it is an extra parameter matching an ellipsis). 5377 INCOMING_P is zero for FUNCTION_ARG, nonzero for FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG. */ 5378 5379rtx 5380function_arg (const struct sparc_args *cum, enum machine_mode mode, 5381 tree type, int named, int incoming_p) 5382{ 5383 int regbase = (incoming_p 5384 ? SPARC_INCOMING_INT_ARG_FIRST 5385 : SPARC_OUTGOING_INT_ARG_FIRST); 5386 int slotno, regno, padding; 5387 enum mode_class mclass = GET_MODE_CLASS (mode); 5388 5389 slotno = function_arg_slotno (cum, mode, type, named, incoming_p, 5390 ®no, &padding); 5391 if (slotno == -1) 5392 return 0; 5393 5394 /* Vector types deserve special treatment because they are polymorphic wrt 5395 their mode, depending upon whether VIS instructions are enabled. */ 5396 if (type && TREE_CODE (type) == VECTOR_TYPE) 5397 { 5398 HOST_WIDE_INT size = int_size_in_bytes (type); 5399 gcc_assert ((TARGET_ARCH32 && size <= 8) 5400 || (TARGET_ARCH64 && size <= 16)); 5401 5402 if (mode == BLKmode) 5403 return function_arg_vector_value (size, 5404 SPARC_FP_ARG_FIRST + 2*slotno); 5405 else 5406 mclass = MODE_FLOAT; 5407 } 5408 5409 if (TARGET_ARCH32) 5410 return gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno); 5411 5412 /* Structures up to 16 bytes in size are passed in arg slots on the stack 5413 and are promoted to registers if possible. */ 5414 if (type && TREE_CODE (type) == RECORD_TYPE) 5415 { 5416 HOST_WIDE_INT size = int_size_in_bytes (type); 5417 gcc_assert (size <= 16); 5418 5419 return function_arg_record_value (type, mode, slotno, named, regbase); 5420 } 5421 5422 /* Unions up to 16 bytes in size are passed in integer registers. */ 5423 else if (type && TREE_CODE (type) == UNION_TYPE) 5424 { 5425 HOST_WIDE_INT size = int_size_in_bytes (type); 5426 gcc_assert (size <= 16); 5427 5428 return function_arg_union_value (size, mode, slotno, regno); 5429 } 5430 5431 /* v9 fp args in reg slots beyond the int reg slots get passed in regs 5432 but also have the slot allocated for them. 5433 If no prototype is in scope fp values in register slots get passed 5434 in two places, either fp regs and int regs or fp regs and memory. */ 5435 else if ((mclass == MODE_FLOAT || mclass == MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT) 5436 && SPARC_FP_REG_P (regno)) 5437 { 5438 rtx reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno); 5439 if (cum->prototype_p || cum->libcall_p) 5440 { 5441 /* "* 2" because fp reg numbers are recorded in 4 byte 5442 quantities. */ 5443#if 0 5444 /* ??? This will cause the value to be passed in the fp reg and 5445 in the stack. When a prototype exists we want to pass the 5446 value in the reg but reserve space on the stack. That's an 5447 optimization, and is deferred [for a bit]. */ 5448 if ((regno - SPARC_FP_ARG_FIRST) >= SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX * 2) 5449 return gen_rtx_PARALLEL (mode, 5450 gen_rtvec (2, 5451 gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, 5452 NULL_RTX, const0_rtx), 5453 gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, 5454 reg, const0_rtx))); 5455 else 5456#else 5457 /* ??? It seems that passing back a register even when past 5458 the area declared by REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE will allocate 5459 space appropriately, and will not copy the data onto the 5460 stack, exactly as we desire. 5461 5462 This is due to locate_and_pad_parm being called in 5463 expand_call whenever reg_parm_stack_space > 0, which 5464 while beneficial to our example here, would seem to be 5465 in error from what had been intended. Ho hum... -- r~ */ 5466#endif 5467 return reg; 5468 } 5469 else 5470 { 5471 rtx v0, v1; 5472 5473 if ((regno - SPARC_FP_ARG_FIRST) < SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX * 2) 5474 { 5475 int intreg; 5476 5477 /* On incoming, we don't need to know that the value 5478 is passed in %f0 and %i0, and it confuses other parts 5479 causing needless spillage even on the simplest cases. */ 5480 if (incoming_p) 5481 return reg; 5482 5483 intreg = (SPARC_OUTGOING_INT_ARG_FIRST 5484 + (regno - SPARC_FP_ARG_FIRST) / 2); 5485 5486 v0 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, reg, const0_rtx); 5487 v1 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, gen_rtx_REG (mode, intreg), 5488 const0_rtx); 5489 return gen_rtx_PARALLEL (mode, gen_rtvec (2, v0, v1)); 5490 } 5491 else 5492 { 5493 v0 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, NULL_RTX, const0_rtx); 5494 v1 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, reg, const0_rtx); 5495 return gen_rtx_PARALLEL (mode, gen_rtvec (2, v0, v1)); 5496 } 5497 } 5498 } 5499 5500 /* All other aggregate types are passed in an integer register in a mode 5501 corresponding to the size of the type. */ 5502 else if (type && AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type)) 5503 { 5504 HOST_WIDE_INT size = int_size_in_bytes (type); 5505 gcc_assert (size <= 16); 5506 5507 mode = mode_for_size (size * BITS_PER_UNIT, MODE_INT, 0); 5508 } 5509 5510 return gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno); 5511} 5512 5513/* For an arg passed partly in registers and partly in memory, 5514 this is the number of bytes of registers used. 5515 For args passed entirely in registers or entirely in memory, zero. 5516 5517 Any arg that starts in the first 6 regs but won't entirely fit in them 5518 needs partial registers on v8. On v9, structures with integer 5519 values in arg slots 5,6 will be passed in %o5 and SP+176, and complex fp 5520 values that begin in the last fp reg [where "last fp reg" varies with the 5521 mode] will be split between that reg and memory. */ 5522 5523static int 5524sparc_arg_partial_bytes (CUMULATIVE_ARGS *cum, enum machine_mode mode, 5525 tree type, bool named) 5526{ 5527 int slotno, regno, padding; 5528 5529 /* We pass 0 for incoming_p here, it doesn't matter. */ 5530 slotno = function_arg_slotno (cum, mode, type, named, 0, ®no, &padding); 5531 5532 if (slotno == -1) 5533 return 0; 5534 5535 if (TARGET_ARCH32) 5536 { 5537 if ((slotno + (mode == BLKmode 5538 ? ROUND_ADVANCE (int_size_in_bytes (type)) 5539 : ROUND_ADVANCE (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode)))) 5540 > SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX) 5541 return (SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - slotno) * UNITS_PER_WORD; 5542 } 5543 else 5544 { 5545 /* We are guaranteed by pass_by_reference that the size of the 5546 argument is not greater than 16 bytes, so we only need to return 5547 one word if the argument is partially passed in registers. */ 5548 5549 if (type && AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type)) 5550 { 5551 int size = int_size_in_bytes (type); 5552 5553 if (size > UNITS_PER_WORD 5554 && slotno == SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - 1) 5555 return UNITS_PER_WORD; 5556 } 5557 else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_COMPLEX_INT 5558 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT 5559 && ! (TARGET_FPU && named))) 5560 { 5561 /* The complex types are passed as packed types. */ 5562 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) > UNITS_PER_WORD 5563 && slotno == SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - 1) 5564 return UNITS_PER_WORD; 5565 } 5566 else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT) 5567 { 5568 if ((slotno + GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) / UNITS_PER_WORD) 5569 > SPARC_FP_ARG_MAX) 5570 return UNITS_PER_WORD; 5571 } 5572 } 5573 5574 return 0; 5575} 5576 5577/* Handle the TARGET_PASS_BY_REFERENCE target hook. 5578 Specify whether to pass the argument by reference. */ 5579 5580static bool 5581sparc_pass_by_reference (CUMULATIVE_ARGS *cum ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, 5582 enum machine_mode mode, const_tree type, 5583 bool named ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED) 5584{ 5585 if (TARGET_ARCH32) 5586 /* Original SPARC 32-bit ABI says that structures and unions, 5587 and quad-precision floats are passed by reference. For Pascal, 5588 also pass arrays by reference. All other base types are passed 5589 in registers. 5590 5591 Extended ABI (as implemented by the Sun compiler) says that all 5592 complex floats are passed by reference. Pass complex integers 5593 in registers up to 8 bytes. More generally, enforce the 2-word 5594 cap for passing arguments in registers. 5595 5596 Vector ABI (as implemented by the Sun VIS SDK) says that vector 5597 integers are passed like floats of the same size, that is in 5598 registers up to 8 bytes. Pass all vector floats by reference 5599 like structure and unions. */ 5600 return ((type && (AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type) || VECTOR_FLOAT_TYPE_P (type))) 5601 || mode == SCmode 5602 /* Catch CDImode, TFmode, DCmode and TCmode. */ 5603 || GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) > 8 5604 || (type 5605 && TREE_CODE (type) == VECTOR_TYPE 5606 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) int_size_in_bytes (type) > 8)); 5607 else 5608 /* Original SPARC 64-bit ABI says that structures and unions 5609 smaller than 16 bytes are passed in registers, as well as 5610 all other base types. 5611 5612 Extended ABI (as implemented by the Sun compiler) says that 5613 complex floats are passed in registers up to 16 bytes. Pass 5614 all complex integers in registers up to 16 bytes. More generally, 5615 enforce the 2-word cap for passing arguments in registers. 5616 5617 Vector ABI (as implemented by the Sun VIS SDK) says that vector 5618 integers are passed like floats of the same size, that is in 5619 registers (up to 16 bytes). Pass all vector floats like structure 5620 and unions. */ 5621 return ((type 5622 && (AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type) || TREE_CODE (type) == VECTOR_TYPE) 5623 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) int_size_in_bytes (type) > 16) 5624 /* Catch CTImode and TCmode. */ 5625 || GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) > 16); 5626} 5627 5628/* Handle the FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE macro. 5629 Update the data in CUM to advance over an argument 5630 of mode MODE and data type TYPE. 5631 TYPE is null for libcalls where that information may not be available. */ 5632 5633void 5634function_arg_advance (struct sparc_args *cum, enum machine_mode mode, 5635 tree type, int named) 5636{ 5637 int regno, padding; 5638 5639 /* We pass 0 for incoming_p here, it doesn't matter. */ 5640 function_arg_slotno (cum, mode, type, named, 0, ®no, &padding); 5641 5642 /* If argument requires leading padding, add it. */ 5643 cum->words += padding; 5644 5645 if (TARGET_ARCH32) 5646 { 5647 cum->words += (mode != BLKmode 5648 ? ROUND_ADVANCE (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode)) 5649 : ROUND_ADVANCE (int_size_in_bytes (type))); 5650 } 5651 else 5652 { 5653 if (type && AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type)) 5654 { 5655 int size = int_size_in_bytes (type); 5656 5657 if (size <= 8) 5658 ++cum->words; 5659 else if (size <= 16) 5660 cum->words += 2; 5661 else /* passed by reference */ 5662 ++cum->words; 5663 } 5664 else 5665 { 5666 cum->words += (mode != BLKmode 5667 ? ROUND_ADVANCE (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode)) 5668 : ROUND_ADVANCE (int_size_in_bytes (type))); 5669 } 5670 } 5671} 5672 5673/* Handle the FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING macro. 5674 For the 64 bit ABI structs are always stored left shifted in their 5675 argument slot. */ 5676 5677enum direction 5678function_arg_padding (enum machine_mode mode, const_tree type) 5679{ 5680 if (TARGET_ARCH64 && type != 0 && AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type)) 5681 return upward; 5682 5683 /* Fall back to the default. */ 5684 return DEFAULT_FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING (mode, type); 5685} 5686 5687/* Handle the TARGET_RETURN_IN_MEMORY target hook. 5688 Specify whether to return the return value in memory. */ 5689 5690static bool 5691sparc_return_in_memory (const_tree type, const_tree fntype ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED) 5692{ 5693 if (TARGET_ARCH32) 5694 /* Original SPARC 32-bit ABI says that structures and unions, 5695 and quad-precision floats are returned in memory. All other 5696 base types are returned in registers. 5697 5698 Extended ABI (as implemented by the Sun compiler) says that 5699 all complex floats are returned in registers (8 FP registers 5700 at most for '_Complex long double'). Return all complex integers 5701 in registers (4 at most for '_Complex long long'). 5702 5703 Vector ABI (as implemented by the Sun VIS SDK) says that vector 5704 integers are returned like floats of the same size, that is in 5705 registers up to 8 bytes and in memory otherwise. Return all 5706 vector floats in memory like structure and unions; note that 5707 they always have BLKmode like the latter. */ 5708 return (TYPE_MODE (type) == BLKmode 5709 || TYPE_MODE (type) == TFmode 5710 || (TREE_CODE (type) == VECTOR_TYPE 5711 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) int_size_in_bytes (type) > 8)); 5712 else 5713 /* Original SPARC 64-bit ABI says that structures and unions 5714 smaller than 32 bytes are returned in registers, as well as 5715 all other base types. 5716 5717 Extended ABI (as implemented by the Sun compiler) says that all 5718 complex floats are returned in registers (8 FP registers at most 5719 for '_Complex long double'). Return all complex integers in 5720 registers (4 at most for '_Complex TItype'). 5721 5722 Vector ABI (as implemented by the Sun VIS SDK) says that vector 5723 integers are returned like floats of the same size, that is in 5724 registers. Return all vector floats like structure and unions; 5725 note that they always have BLKmode like the latter. */ 5726 return ((TYPE_MODE (type) == BLKmode 5727 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) int_size_in_bytes (type) > 32)); 5728} 5729 5730/* Handle the TARGET_STRUCT_VALUE target hook. 5731 Return where to find the structure return value address. */ 5732 5733static rtx 5734sparc_struct_value_rtx (tree fndecl, int incoming) 5735{ 5736 if (TARGET_ARCH64) 5737 return 0; 5738 else 5739 { 5740 rtx mem; 5741 5742 if (incoming) 5743 mem = gen_rtx_MEM (Pmode, plus_constant (frame_pointer_rtx, 5744 STRUCT_VALUE_OFFSET)); 5745 else 5746 mem = gen_rtx_MEM (Pmode, plus_constant (stack_pointer_rtx, 5747 STRUCT_VALUE_OFFSET)); 5748 5749 /* Only follow the SPARC ABI for fixed-size structure returns. 5750 Variable size structure returns are handled per the normal 5751 procedures in GCC. This is enabled by -mstd-struct-return */ 5752 if (incoming == 2 5753 && sparc_std_struct_return 5754 && TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (TREE_TYPE (fndecl)) 5755 && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (TREE_TYPE (fndecl))) == INTEGER_CST) 5756 { 5757 /* We must check and adjust the return address, as it is 5758 optional as to whether the return object is really 5759 provided. */ 5760 rtx ret_rtx = gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 31); 5761 rtx scratch = gen_reg_rtx (SImode); 5762 rtx endlab = gen_label_rtx (); 5763 5764 /* Calculate the return object size */ 5765 tree size = TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (TREE_TYPE (fndecl)); 5766 rtx size_rtx = GEN_INT (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (size) & 0xfff); 5767 /* Construct a temporary return value */ 5768 rtx temp_val = assign_stack_local (Pmode, TREE_INT_CST_LOW (size), 0); 5769 5770 /* Implement SPARC 32-bit psABI callee returns struck checking 5771 requirements: 5772 5773 Fetch the instruction where we will return to and see if 5774 it's an unimp instruction (the most significant 10 bits 5775 will be zero). */ 5776 emit_move_insn (scratch, gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, 5777 plus_constant (ret_rtx, 8))); 5778 /* Assume the size is valid and pre-adjust */ 5779 emit_insn (gen_add3_insn (ret_rtx, ret_rtx, GEN_INT (4))); 5780 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (scratch, size_rtx, EQ, const0_rtx, SImode, 0, endlab); 5781 emit_insn (gen_sub3_insn (ret_rtx, ret_rtx, GEN_INT (4))); 5782 /* Assign stack temp: 5783 Write the address of the memory pointed to by temp_val into 5784 the memory pointed to by mem */ 5785 emit_move_insn (mem, XEXP (temp_val, 0)); 5786 emit_label (endlab); 5787 } 5788 5789 set_mem_alias_set (mem, struct_value_alias_set); 5790 return mem; 5791 } 5792} 5793 5794/* Handle FUNCTION_VALUE, FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE, and LIBCALL_VALUE macros. 5795 For v9, function return values are subject to the same rules as arguments, 5796 except that up to 32 bytes may be returned in registers. */ 5797 5798rtx 5799function_value (const_tree type, enum machine_mode mode, int incoming_p) 5800{ 5801 /* Beware that the two values are swapped here wrt function_arg. */ 5802 int regbase = (incoming_p 5803 ? SPARC_OUTGOING_INT_ARG_FIRST 5804 : SPARC_INCOMING_INT_ARG_FIRST); 5805 enum mode_class mclass = GET_MODE_CLASS (mode); 5806 int regno; 5807 5808 /* Vector types deserve special treatment because they are polymorphic wrt 5809 their mode, depending upon whether VIS instructions are enabled. */ 5810 if (type && TREE_CODE (type) == VECTOR_TYPE) 5811 { 5812 HOST_WIDE_INT size = int_size_in_bytes (type); 5813 gcc_assert ((TARGET_ARCH32 && size <= 8) 5814 || (TARGET_ARCH64 && size <= 32)); 5815 5816 if (mode == BLKmode) 5817 return function_arg_vector_value (size, 5818 SPARC_FP_ARG_FIRST); 5819 else 5820 mclass = MODE_FLOAT; 5821 } 5822 5823 if (TARGET_ARCH64 && type) 5824 { 5825 /* Structures up to 32 bytes in size are returned in registers. */ 5826 if (TREE_CODE (type) == RECORD_TYPE) 5827 { 5828 HOST_WIDE_INT size = int_size_in_bytes (type); 5829 gcc_assert (size <= 32); 5830 5831 return function_arg_record_value (type, mode, 0, 1, regbase); 5832 } 5833 5834 /* Unions up to 32 bytes in size are returned in integer registers. */ 5835 else if (TREE_CODE (type) == UNION_TYPE) 5836 { 5837 HOST_WIDE_INT size = int_size_in_bytes (type); 5838 gcc_assert (size <= 32); 5839 5840 return function_arg_union_value (size, mode, 0, regbase); 5841 } 5842 5843 /* Objects that require it are returned in FP registers. */ 5844 else if (mclass == MODE_FLOAT || mclass == MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT) 5845 ; 5846 5847 /* All other aggregate types are returned in an integer register in a 5848 mode corresponding to the size of the type. */ 5849 else if (AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type)) 5850 { 5851 /* All other aggregate types are passed in an integer register 5852 in a mode corresponding to the size of the type. */ 5853 HOST_WIDE_INT size = int_size_in_bytes (type); 5854 gcc_assert (size <= 32); 5855 5856 mode = mode_for_size (size * BITS_PER_UNIT, MODE_INT, 0); 5857 5858 /* ??? We probably should have made the same ABI change in 5859 3.4.0 as the one we made for unions. The latter was 5860 required by the SCD though, while the former is not 5861 specified, so we favored compatibility and efficiency. 5862 5863 Now we're stuck for aggregates larger than 16 bytes, 5864 because OImode vanished in the meantime. Let's not 5865 try to be unduly clever, and simply follow the ABI 5866 for unions in that case. */ 5867 if (mode == BLKmode) 5868 return function_arg_union_value (size, mode, 0, regbase); 5869 else 5870 mclass = MODE_INT; 5871 } 5872 5873 /* This must match sparc_promote_function_mode. 5874 ??? Maybe 32-bit pointers should actually remain in Pmode? */ 5875 else if (mclass == MODE_INT && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < UNITS_PER_WORD) 5876 mode = word_mode; 5877 } 5878 5879 if ((mclass == MODE_FLOAT || mclass == MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT) && TARGET_FPU) 5880 regno = SPARC_FP_ARG_FIRST; 5881 else 5882 regno = regbase; 5883 5884 return gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno); 5885} 5886 5887/* Do what is necessary for `va_start'. We look at the current function 5888 to determine if stdarg or varargs is used and return the address of 5889 the first unnamed parameter. */ 5890 5891static rtx 5892sparc_builtin_saveregs (void) 5893{ 5894 int first_reg = crtl->args.info.words; 5895 rtx address; 5896 int regno; 5897 5898 for (regno = first_reg; regno < SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX; regno++) 5899 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (word_mode, 5900 gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, 5901 frame_pointer_rtx, 5902 GEN_INT (FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (0) 5903 + (UNITS_PER_WORD 5904 * regno)))), 5905 gen_rtx_REG (word_mode, 5906 SPARC_INCOMING_INT_ARG_FIRST + regno)); 5907 5908 address = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, 5909 frame_pointer_rtx, 5910 GEN_INT (FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (0) 5911 + UNITS_PER_WORD * first_reg)); 5912 5913 return address; 5914} 5915 5916/* Implement `va_start' for stdarg. */ 5917 5918static void 5919sparc_va_start (tree valist, rtx nextarg) 5920{ 5921 nextarg = expand_builtin_saveregs (); 5922 std_expand_builtin_va_start (valist, nextarg); 5923} 5924 5925/* Implement `va_arg' for stdarg. */ 5926 5927static tree 5928sparc_gimplify_va_arg (tree valist, tree type, gimple_seq *pre_p, 5929 gimple_seq *post_p) 5930{ 5931 HOST_WIDE_INT size, rsize, align; 5932 tree addr, incr; 5933 bool indirect; 5934 tree ptrtype = build_pointer_type (type); 5935 5936 if (pass_by_reference (NULL, TYPE_MODE (type), type, false)) 5937 { 5938 indirect = true; 5939 size = rsize = UNITS_PER_WORD; 5940 align = 0; 5941 } 5942 else 5943 { 5944 indirect = false; 5945 size = int_size_in_bytes (type); 5946 rsize = (size + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) & -UNITS_PER_WORD; 5947 align = 0; 5948 5949 if (TARGET_ARCH64) 5950 { 5951 /* For SPARC64, objects requiring 16-byte alignment get it. */ 5952 if (TYPE_ALIGN (type) >= 2 * (unsigned) BITS_PER_WORD) 5953 align = 2 * UNITS_PER_WORD; 5954 5955 /* SPARC-V9 ABI states that structures up to 16 bytes in size 5956 are left-justified in their slots. */ 5957 if (AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type)) 5958 { 5959 if (size == 0) 5960 size = rsize = UNITS_PER_WORD; 5961 else 5962 size = rsize; 5963 } 5964 } 5965 } 5966 5967 incr = valist; 5968 if (align) 5969 { 5970 incr = fold_build2 (POINTER_PLUS_EXPR, ptr_type_node, incr, 5971 size_int (align - 1)); 5972 incr = fold_convert (sizetype, incr); 5973 incr = fold_build2 (BIT_AND_EXPR, sizetype, incr, 5974 size_int (-align)); 5975 incr = fold_convert (ptr_type_node, incr); 5976 } 5977 5978 gimplify_expr (&incr, pre_p, post_p, is_gimple_val, fb_rvalue); 5979 addr = incr; 5980 5981 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN && size < rsize) 5982 addr = fold_build2 (POINTER_PLUS_EXPR, ptr_type_node, incr, 5983 size_int (rsize - size)); 5984 5985 if (indirect) 5986 { 5987 addr = fold_convert (build_pointer_type (ptrtype), addr); 5988 addr = build_va_arg_indirect_ref (addr); 5989 } 5990 5991 /* If the address isn't aligned properly for the type, we need a temporary. 5992 FIXME: This is inefficient, usually we can do this in registers. */ 5993 else if (align == 0 && TYPE_ALIGN (type) > BITS_PER_WORD) 5994 { 5995 tree tmp = create_tmp_var (type, "va_arg_tmp"); 5996 tree dest_addr = build_fold_addr_expr (tmp); 5997 tree copy = build_call_expr (implicit_built_in_decls[BUILT_IN_MEMCPY], 5998 3, dest_addr, addr, size_int (rsize)); 5999 TREE_ADDRESSABLE (tmp) = 1; 6000 gimplify_and_add (copy, pre_p); 6001 addr = dest_addr; 6002 } 6003 6004 else 6005 addr = fold_convert (ptrtype, addr); 6006 6007 incr 6008 = fold_build2 (POINTER_PLUS_EXPR, ptr_type_node, incr, size_int (rsize)); 6009 gimplify_assign (valist, incr, post_p); 6010 6011 return build_va_arg_indirect_ref (addr); 6012} 6013 6014/* Implement the TARGET_VECTOR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P target hook. 6015 Specify whether the vector mode is supported by the hardware. */ 6016 6017static bool 6018sparc_vector_mode_supported_p (enum machine_mode mode) 6019{ 6020 return TARGET_VIS && VECTOR_MODE_P (mode) ? true : false; 6021} 6022 6023/* Return the string to output an unconditional branch to LABEL, which is 6024 the operand number of the label. 6025 6026 DEST is the destination insn (i.e. the label), INSN is the source. */ 6027 6028const char * 6029output_ubranch (rtx dest, int label, rtx insn) 6030{ 6031 static char string[64]; 6032 bool v9_form = false; 6033 char *p; 6034 6035 if (TARGET_V9 && INSN_ADDRESSES_SET_P ()) 6036 { 6037 int delta = (INSN_ADDRESSES (INSN_UID (dest)) 6038 - INSN_ADDRESSES (INSN_UID (insn))); 6039 /* Leave some instructions for "slop". */ 6040 if (delta >= -260000 && delta < 260000) 6041 v9_form = true; 6042 } 6043 6044 if (v9_form) 6045 strcpy (string, "ba%*,pt\t%%xcc, "); 6046 else 6047 strcpy (string, "b%*\t"); 6048 6049 p = strchr (string, '\0'); 6050 *p++ = '%'; 6051 *p++ = 'l'; 6052 *p++ = '0' + label; 6053 *p++ = '%'; 6054 *p++ = '('; 6055 *p = '\0'; 6056 6057 return string; 6058} 6059 6060/* Return the string to output a conditional branch to LABEL, which is 6061 the operand number of the label. OP is the conditional expression. 6062 XEXP (OP, 0) is assumed to be a condition code register (integer or 6063 floating point) and its mode specifies what kind of comparison we made. 6064 6065 DEST is the destination insn (i.e. the label), INSN is the source. 6066 6067 REVERSED is nonzero if we should reverse the sense of the comparison. 6068 6069 ANNUL is nonzero if we should generate an annulling branch. */ 6070 6071const char * 6072output_cbranch (rtx op, rtx dest, int label, int reversed, int annul, 6073 rtx insn) 6074{ 6075 static char string[64]; 6076 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (op); 6077 rtx cc_reg = XEXP (op, 0); 6078 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (cc_reg); 6079 const char *labelno, *branch; 6080 int spaces = 8, far; 6081 char *p; 6082 6083 /* v9 branches are limited to +-1MB. If it is too far away, 6084 change 6085 6086 bne,pt %xcc, .LC30 6087 6088 to 6089 6090 be,pn %xcc, .+12 6091 nop 6092 ba .LC30 6093 6094 and 6095 6096 fbne,a,pn %fcc2, .LC29 6097 6098 to 6099 6100 fbe,pt %fcc2, .+16 6101 nop 6102 ba .LC29 */ 6103 6104 far = TARGET_V9 && (get_attr_length (insn) >= 3); 6105 if (reversed ^ far) 6106 { 6107 /* Reversal of FP compares takes care -- an ordered compare 6108 becomes an unordered compare and vice versa. */ 6109 if (mode == CCFPmode || mode == CCFPEmode) 6110 code = reverse_condition_maybe_unordered (code); 6111 else 6112 code = reverse_condition (code); 6113 } 6114 6115 /* Start by writing the branch condition. */ 6116 if (mode == CCFPmode || mode == CCFPEmode) 6117 { 6118 switch (code) 6119 { 6120 case NE: 6121 branch = "fbne"; 6122 break; 6123 case EQ: 6124 branch = "fbe"; 6125 break; 6126 case GE: 6127 branch = "fbge"; 6128 break; 6129 case GT: 6130 branch = "fbg"; 6131 break; 6132 case LE: 6133 branch = "fble"; 6134 break; 6135 case LT: 6136 branch = "fbl"; 6137 break; 6138 case UNORDERED: 6139 branch = "fbu"; 6140 break; 6141 case ORDERED: 6142 branch = "fbo"; 6143 break; 6144 case UNGT: 6145 branch = "fbug"; 6146 break; 6147 case UNLT: 6148 branch = "fbul"; 6149 break; 6150 case UNEQ: 6151 branch = "fbue"; 6152 break; 6153 case UNGE: 6154 branch = "fbuge"; 6155 break; 6156 case UNLE: 6157 branch = "fbule"; 6158 break; 6159 case LTGT: 6160 branch = "fblg"; 6161 break; 6162 6163 default: 6164 gcc_unreachable (); 6165 } 6166 6167 /* ??? !v9: FP branches cannot be preceded by another floating point 6168 insn. Because there is currently no concept of pre-delay slots, 6169 we can fix this only by always emitting a nop before a floating 6170 point branch. */ 6171 6172 string[0] = '\0'; 6173 if (! TARGET_V9) 6174 strcpy (string, "nop\n\t"); 6175 strcat (string, branch); 6176 } 6177 else 6178 { 6179 switch (code) 6180 { 6181 case NE: 6182 branch = "bne"; 6183 break; 6184 case EQ: 6185 branch = "be"; 6186 break; 6187 case GE: 6188 if (mode == CC_NOOVmode || mode == CCX_NOOVmode) 6189 branch = "bpos"; 6190 else 6191 branch = "bge"; 6192 break; 6193 case GT: 6194 branch = "bg"; 6195 break; 6196 case LE: 6197 branch = "ble"; 6198 break; 6199 case LT: 6200 if (mode == CC_NOOVmode || mode == CCX_NOOVmode) 6201 branch = "bneg"; 6202 else 6203 branch = "bl"; 6204 break; 6205 case GEU: 6206 branch = "bgeu"; 6207 break; 6208 case GTU: 6209 branch = "bgu"; 6210 break; 6211 case LEU: 6212 branch = "bleu"; 6213 break; 6214 case LTU: 6215 branch = "blu"; 6216 break; 6217 6218 default: 6219 gcc_unreachable (); 6220 } 6221 strcpy (string, branch); 6222 } 6223 spaces -= strlen (branch); 6224 p = strchr (string, '\0'); 6225 6226 /* Now add the annulling, the label, and a possible noop. */ 6227 if (annul && ! far) 6228 { 6229 strcpy (p, ",a"); 6230 p += 2; 6231 spaces -= 2; 6232 } 6233 6234 if (TARGET_V9) 6235 { 6236 rtx note; 6237 int v8 = 0; 6238 6239 if (! far && insn && INSN_ADDRESSES_SET_P ()) 6240 { 6241 int delta = (INSN_ADDRESSES (INSN_UID (dest)) 6242 - INSN_ADDRESSES (INSN_UID (insn))); 6243 /* Leave some instructions for "slop". */ 6244 if (delta < -260000 || delta >= 260000) 6245 v8 = 1; 6246 } 6247 6248 if (mode == CCFPmode || mode == CCFPEmode) 6249 { 6250 static char v9_fcc_labelno[] = "%%fccX, "; 6251 /* Set the char indicating the number of the fcc reg to use. */ 6252 v9_fcc_labelno[5] = REGNO (cc_reg) - SPARC_FIRST_V9_FCC_REG + '0'; 6253 labelno = v9_fcc_labelno; 6254 if (v8) 6255 { 6256 gcc_assert (REGNO (cc_reg) == SPARC_FCC_REG); 6257 labelno = ""; 6258 } 6259 } 6260 else if (mode == CCXmode || mode == CCX_NOOVmode) 6261 { 6262 labelno = "%%xcc, "; 6263 gcc_assert (! v8); 6264 } 6265 else 6266 { 6267 labelno = "%%icc, "; 6268 if (v8) 6269 labelno = ""; 6270 } 6271 6272 if (*labelno && insn && (note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_BR_PROB, NULL_RTX))) 6273 { 6274 strcpy (p, 6275 ((INTVAL (XEXP (note, 0)) >= REG_BR_PROB_BASE / 2) ^ far) 6276 ? ",pt" : ",pn"); 6277 p += 3; 6278 spaces -= 3; 6279 } 6280 } 6281 else 6282 labelno = ""; 6283 6284 if (spaces > 0) 6285 *p++ = '\t'; 6286 else 6287 *p++ = ' '; 6288 strcpy (p, labelno); 6289 p = strchr (p, '\0'); 6290 if (far) 6291 { 6292 strcpy (p, ".+12\n\t nop\n\tb\t"); 6293 /* Skip the next insn if requested or 6294 if we know that it will be a nop. */ 6295 if (annul || ! final_sequence) 6296 p[3] = '6'; 6297 p += 14; 6298 } 6299 *p++ = '%'; 6300 *p++ = 'l'; 6301 *p++ = label + '0'; 6302 *p++ = '%'; 6303 *p++ = '#'; 6304 *p = '\0'; 6305 6306 return string; 6307} 6308 6309/* Emit a library call comparison between floating point X and Y. 6310 COMPARISON is the operator to compare with (EQ, NE, GT, etc). 6311 Return the new operator to be used in the comparison sequence. 6312 6313 TARGET_ARCH64 uses _Qp_* functions, which use pointers to TFmode 6314 values as arguments instead of the TFmode registers themselves, 6315 that's why we cannot call emit_float_lib_cmp. */ 6316 6317rtx 6318sparc_emit_float_lib_cmp (rtx x, rtx y, enum rtx_code comparison) 6319{ 6320 const char *qpfunc; 6321 rtx slot0, slot1, result, tem, tem2, libfunc; 6322 enum machine_mode mode; 6323 enum rtx_code new_comparison; 6324 6325 switch (comparison) 6326 { 6327 case EQ: 6328 qpfunc = (TARGET_ARCH64 ? "_Qp_feq" : "_Q_feq"); 6329 break; 6330 6331 case NE: 6332 qpfunc = (TARGET_ARCH64 ? "_Qp_fne" : "_Q_fne"); 6333 break; 6334 6335 case GT: 6336 qpfunc = (TARGET_ARCH64 ? "_Qp_fgt" : "_Q_fgt"); 6337 break; 6338 6339 case GE: 6340 qpfunc = (TARGET_ARCH64 ? "_Qp_fge" : "_Q_fge"); 6341 break; 6342 6343 case LT: 6344 qpfunc = (TARGET_ARCH64 ? "_Qp_flt" : "_Q_flt"); 6345 break; 6346 6347 case LE: 6348 qpfunc = (TARGET_ARCH64 ? "_Qp_fle" : "_Q_fle"); 6349 break; 6350 6351 case ORDERED: 6352 case UNORDERED: 6353 case UNGT: 6354 case UNLT: 6355 case UNEQ: 6356 case UNGE: 6357 case UNLE: 6358 case LTGT: 6359 qpfunc = (TARGET_ARCH64 ? "_Qp_cmp" : "_Q_cmp"); 6360 break; 6361 6362 default: 6363 gcc_unreachable (); 6364 } 6365 6366 if (TARGET_ARCH64) 6367 { 6368 if (MEM_P (x)) 6369 slot0 = x; 6370 else 6371 { 6372 slot0 = assign_stack_temp (TFmode, GET_MODE_SIZE(TFmode), 0); 6373 emit_move_insn (slot0, x); 6374 } 6375 6376 if (MEM_P (y)) 6377 slot1 = y; 6378 else 6379 { 6380 slot1 = assign_stack_temp (TFmode, GET_MODE_SIZE(TFmode), 0); 6381 emit_move_insn (slot1, y); 6382 } 6383 6384 libfunc = gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, qpfunc); 6385 emit_library_call (libfunc, LCT_NORMAL, 6386 DImode, 2, 6387 XEXP (slot0, 0), Pmode, 6388 XEXP (slot1, 0), Pmode); 6389 mode = DImode; 6390 } 6391 else 6392 { 6393 libfunc = gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, qpfunc); 6394 emit_library_call (libfunc, LCT_NORMAL, 6395 SImode, 2, 6396 x, TFmode, y, TFmode); 6397 mode = SImode; 6398 } 6399 6400 6401 /* Immediately move the result of the libcall into a pseudo 6402 register so reload doesn't clobber the value if it needs 6403 the return register for a spill reg. */ 6404 result = gen_reg_rtx (mode); 6405 emit_move_insn (result, hard_libcall_value (mode, libfunc)); 6406 6407 switch (comparison) 6408 { 6409 default: 6410 return gen_rtx_NE (VOIDmode, result, const0_rtx); 6411 case ORDERED: 6412 case UNORDERED: 6413 new_comparison = (comparison == UNORDERED ? EQ : NE); 6414 return gen_rtx_fmt_ee (new_comparison, VOIDmode, result, GEN_INT(3)); 6415 case UNGT: 6416 case UNGE: 6417 new_comparison = (comparison == UNGT ? GT : NE); 6418 return gen_rtx_fmt_ee (new_comparison, VOIDmode, result, const1_rtx); 6419 case UNLE: 6420 return gen_rtx_NE (VOIDmode, result, const2_rtx); 6421 case UNLT: 6422 tem = gen_reg_rtx (mode); 6423 if (TARGET_ARCH32) 6424 emit_insn (gen_andsi3 (tem, result, const1_rtx)); 6425 else 6426 emit_insn (gen_anddi3 (tem, result, const1_rtx)); 6427 return gen_rtx_NE (VOIDmode, tem, const0_rtx); 6428 case UNEQ: 6429 case LTGT: 6430 tem = gen_reg_rtx (mode); 6431 if (TARGET_ARCH32) 6432 emit_insn (gen_addsi3 (tem, result, const1_rtx)); 6433 else 6434 emit_insn (gen_adddi3 (tem, result, const1_rtx)); 6435 tem2 = gen_reg_rtx (mode); 6436 if (TARGET_ARCH32) 6437 emit_insn (gen_andsi3 (tem2, tem, const2_rtx)); 6438 else 6439 emit_insn (gen_anddi3 (tem2, tem, const2_rtx)); 6440 new_comparison = (comparison == UNEQ ? EQ : NE); 6441 return gen_rtx_fmt_ee (new_comparison, VOIDmode, tem2, const0_rtx); 6442 } 6443 6444 gcc_unreachable (); 6445} 6446 6447/* Generate an unsigned DImode to FP conversion. This is the same code 6448 optabs would emit if we didn't have TFmode patterns. */ 6449 6450void 6451sparc_emit_floatunsdi (rtx *operands, enum machine_mode mode) 6452{ 6453 rtx neglab, donelab, i0, i1, f0, in, out; 6454 6455 out = operands[0]; 6456 in = force_reg (DImode, operands[1]); 6457 neglab = gen_label_rtx (); 6458 donelab = gen_label_rtx (); 6459 i0 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode); 6460 i1 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode); 6461 f0 = gen_reg_rtx (mode); 6462 6463 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (in, const0_rtx, LT, const0_rtx, DImode, 0, neglab); 6464 6465 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, out, gen_rtx_FLOAT (mode, in))); 6466 emit_jump_insn (gen_jump (donelab)); 6467 emit_barrier (); 6468 6469 emit_label (neglab); 6470 6471 emit_insn (gen_lshrdi3 (i0, in, const1_rtx)); 6472 emit_insn (gen_anddi3 (i1, in, const1_rtx)); 6473 emit_insn (gen_iordi3 (i0, i0, i1)); 6474 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, f0, gen_rtx_FLOAT (mode, i0))); 6475 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, out, gen_rtx_PLUS (mode, f0, f0))); 6476 6477 emit_label (donelab); 6478} 6479 6480/* Generate an FP to unsigned DImode conversion. This is the same code 6481 optabs would emit if we didn't have TFmode patterns. */ 6482 6483void 6484sparc_emit_fixunsdi (rtx *operands, enum machine_mode mode) 6485{ 6486 rtx neglab, donelab, i0, i1, f0, in, out, limit; 6487 6488 out = operands[0]; 6489 in = force_reg (mode, operands[1]); 6490 neglab = gen_label_rtx (); 6491 donelab = gen_label_rtx (); 6492 i0 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode); 6493 i1 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode); 6494 limit = gen_reg_rtx (mode); 6495 f0 = gen_reg_rtx (mode); 6496 6497 emit_move_insn (limit, 6498 CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE ( 6499 REAL_VALUE_ATOF ("9223372036854775808.0", mode), mode)); 6500 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (in, limit, GE, NULL_RTX, mode, 0, neglab); 6501 6502 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, 6503 out, 6504 gen_rtx_FIX (DImode, gen_rtx_FIX (mode, in)))); 6505 emit_jump_insn (gen_jump (donelab)); 6506 emit_barrier (); 6507 6508 emit_label (neglab); 6509 6510 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, f0, gen_rtx_MINUS (mode, in, limit))); 6511 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, 6512 i0, 6513 gen_rtx_FIX (DImode, gen_rtx_FIX (mode, f0)))); 6514 emit_insn (gen_movdi (i1, const1_rtx)); 6515 emit_insn (gen_ashldi3 (i1, i1, GEN_INT (63))); 6516 emit_insn (gen_xordi3 (out, i0, i1)); 6517 6518 emit_label (donelab); 6519} 6520 6521/* Return the string to output a conditional branch to LABEL, testing 6522 register REG. LABEL is the operand number of the label; REG is the 6523 operand number of the reg. OP is the conditional expression. The mode 6524 of REG says what kind of comparison we made. 6525 6526 DEST is the destination insn (i.e. the label), INSN is the source. 6527 6528 REVERSED is nonzero if we should reverse the sense of the comparison. 6529 6530 ANNUL is nonzero if we should generate an annulling branch. */ 6531 6532const char * 6533output_v9branch (rtx op, rtx dest, int reg, int label, int reversed, 6534 int annul, rtx insn) 6535{ 6536 static char string[64]; 6537 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (op); 6538 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0)); 6539 rtx note; 6540 int far; 6541 char *p; 6542 6543 /* branch on register are limited to +-128KB. If it is too far away, 6544 change 6545 6546 brnz,pt %g1, .LC30 6547 6548 to 6549 6550 brz,pn %g1, .+12 6551 nop 6552 ba,pt %xcc, .LC30 6553 6554 and 6555 6556 brgez,a,pn %o1, .LC29 6557 6558 to 6559 6560 brlz,pt %o1, .+16 6561 nop 6562 ba,pt %xcc, .LC29 */ 6563 6564 far = get_attr_length (insn) >= 3; 6565 6566 /* If not floating-point or if EQ or NE, we can just reverse the code. */ 6567 if (reversed ^ far) 6568 code = reverse_condition (code); 6569 6570 /* Only 64 bit versions of these instructions exist. */ 6571 gcc_assert (mode == DImode); 6572 6573 /* Start by writing the branch condition. */ 6574 6575 switch (code) 6576 { 6577 case NE: 6578 strcpy (string, "brnz"); 6579 break; 6580 6581 case EQ: 6582 strcpy (string, "brz"); 6583 break; 6584 6585 case GE: 6586 strcpy (string, "brgez"); 6587 break; 6588 6589 case LT: 6590 strcpy (string, "brlz"); 6591 break; 6592 6593 case LE: 6594 strcpy (string, "brlez"); 6595 break; 6596 6597 case GT: 6598 strcpy (string, "brgz"); 6599 break; 6600 6601 default: 6602 gcc_unreachable (); 6603 } 6604 6605 p = strchr (string, '\0'); 6606 6607 /* Now add the annulling, reg, label, and nop. */ 6608 if (annul && ! far) 6609 { 6610 strcpy (p, ",a"); 6611 p += 2; 6612 } 6613 6614 if (insn && (note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_BR_PROB, NULL_RTX))) 6615 { 6616 strcpy (p, 6617 ((INTVAL (XEXP (note, 0)) >= REG_BR_PROB_BASE / 2) ^ far) 6618 ? ",pt" : ",pn"); 6619 p += 3; 6620 } 6621 6622 *p = p < string + 8 ? '\t' : ' '; 6623 p++; 6624 *p++ = '%'; 6625 *p++ = '0' + reg; 6626 *p++ = ','; 6627 *p++ = ' '; 6628 if (far) 6629 { 6630 int veryfar = 1, delta; 6631 6632 if (INSN_ADDRESSES_SET_P ()) 6633 { 6634 delta = (INSN_ADDRESSES (INSN_UID (dest)) 6635 - INSN_ADDRESSES (INSN_UID (insn))); 6636 /* Leave some instructions for "slop". */ 6637 if (delta >= -260000 && delta < 260000) 6638 veryfar = 0; 6639 } 6640 6641 strcpy (p, ".+12\n\t nop\n\t"); 6642 /* Skip the next insn if requested or 6643 if we know that it will be a nop. */ 6644 if (annul || ! final_sequence) 6645 p[3] = '6'; 6646 p += 12; 6647 if (veryfar) 6648 { 6649 strcpy (p, "b\t"); 6650 p += 2; 6651 } 6652 else 6653 { 6654 strcpy (p, "ba,pt\t%%xcc, "); 6655 p += 13; 6656 } 6657 } 6658 *p++ = '%'; 6659 *p++ = 'l'; 6660 *p++ = '0' + label; 6661 *p++ = '%'; 6662 *p++ = '#'; 6663 *p = '\0'; 6664 6665 return string; 6666} 6667 6668/* Return 1, if any of the registers of the instruction are %l[0-7] or %o[0-7]. 6669 Such instructions cannot be used in the delay slot of return insn on v9. 6670 If TEST is 0, also rename all %i[0-7] registers to their %o[0-7] counterparts. 6671 */ 6672 6673static int 6674epilogue_renumber (register rtx *where, int test) 6675{ 6676 register const char *fmt; 6677 register int i; 6678 register enum rtx_code code; 6679 6680 if (*where == 0) 6681 return 0; 6682 6683 code = GET_CODE (*where); 6684 6685 switch (code) 6686 { 6687 case REG: 6688 if (REGNO (*where) >= 8 && REGNO (*where) < 24) /* oX or lX */ 6689 return 1; 6690 if (! test && REGNO (*where) >= 24 && REGNO (*where) < 32) 6691 *where = gen_rtx_REG (GET_MODE (*where), OUTGOING_REGNO (REGNO(*where))); 6692 case SCRATCH: 6693 case CC0: 6694 case PC: 6695 case CONST_INT: 6696 case CONST_DOUBLE: 6697 return 0; 6698 6699 /* Do not replace the frame pointer with the stack pointer because 6700 it can cause the delayed instruction to load below the stack. 6701 This occurs when instructions like: 6702 6703 (set (reg/i:SI 24 %i0) 6704 (mem/f:SI (plus:SI (reg/f:SI 30 %fp) 6705 (const_int -20 [0xffffffec])) 0)) 6706 6707 are in the return delayed slot. */ 6708 case PLUS: 6709 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (*where, 0)) == REG 6710 && REGNO (XEXP (*where, 0)) == HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM 6711 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (*where, 1)) != CONST_INT 6712 || INTVAL (XEXP (*where, 1)) < SPARC_STACK_BIAS)) 6713 return 1; 6714 break; 6715 6716 case MEM: 6717 if (SPARC_STACK_BIAS 6718 && GET_CODE (XEXP (*where, 0)) == REG 6719 && REGNO (XEXP (*where, 0)) == HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM) 6720 return 1; 6721 break; 6722 6723 default: 6724 break; 6725 } 6726 6727 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code); 6728 6729 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--) 6730 { 6731 if (fmt[i] == 'E') 6732 { 6733 register int j; 6734 for (j = XVECLEN (*where, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--) 6735 if (epilogue_renumber (&(XVECEXP (*where, i, j)), test)) 6736 return 1; 6737 } 6738 else if (fmt[i] == 'e' 6739 && epilogue_renumber (&(XEXP (*where, i)), test)) 6740 return 1; 6741 } 6742 return 0; 6743} 6744 6745/* Leaf functions and non-leaf functions have different needs. */ 6746 6747static const int 6748reg_leaf_alloc_order[] = REG_LEAF_ALLOC_ORDER; 6749 6750static const int 6751reg_nonleaf_alloc_order[] = REG_ALLOC_ORDER; 6752 6753static const int *const reg_alloc_orders[] = { 6754 reg_leaf_alloc_order, 6755 reg_nonleaf_alloc_order}; 6756 6757void 6758order_regs_for_local_alloc (void) 6759{ 6760 static int last_order_nonleaf = 1; 6761 6762 if (df_regs_ever_live_p (15) != last_order_nonleaf) 6763 { 6764 last_order_nonleaf = !last_order_nonleaf; 6765 memcpy ((char *) reg_alloc_order, 6766 (const char *) reg_alloc_orders[last_order_nonleaf], 6767 FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER * sizeof (int)); 6768 } 6769} 6770 6771/* Return 1 if REG and MEM are legitimate enough to allow the various 6772 mem<-->reg splits to be run. */ 6773 6774int 6775sparc_splitdi_legitimate (rtx reg, rtx mem) 6776{ 6777 /* Punt if we are here by mistake. */ 6778 gcc_assert (reload_completed); 6779 6780 /* We must have an offsettable memory reference. */ 6781 if (! offsettable_memref_p (mem)) 6782 return 0; 6783 6784 /* If we have legitimate args for ldd/std, we do not want 6785 the split to happen. */ 6786 if ((REGNO (reg) % 2) == 0 6787 && mem_min_alignment (mem, 8)) 6788 return 0; 6789 6790 /* Success. */ 6791 return 1; 6792} 6793 6794/* Return 1 if x and y are some kind of REG and they refer to 6795 different hard registers. This test is guaranteed to be 6796 run after reload. */ 6797 6798int 6799sparc_absnegfloat_split_legitimate (rtx x, rtx y) 6800{ 6801 if (GET_CODE (x) != REG) 6802 return 0; 6803 if (GET_CODE (y) != REG) 6804 return 0; 6805 if (REGNO (x) == REGNO (y)) 6806 return 0; 6807 return 1; 6808} 6809 6810/* Return 1 if REGNO (reg1) is even and REGNO (reg1) == REGNO (reg2) - 1. 6811 This makes them candidates for using ldd and std insns. 6812 6813 Note reg1 and reg2 *must* be hard registers. */ 6814 6815int 6816registers_ok_for_ldd_peep (rtx reg1, rtx reg2) 6817{ 6818 /* We might have been passed a SUBREG. */ 6819 if (GET_CODE (reg1) != REG || GET_CODE (reg2) != REG) 6820 return 0; 6821 6822 if (REGNO (reg1) % 2 != 0) 6823 return 0; 6824 6825 /* Integer ldd is deprecated in SPARC V9 */ 6826 if (TARGET_V9 && REGNO (reg1) < 32) 6827 return 0; 6828 6829 return (REGNO (reg1) == REGNO (reg2) - 1); 6830} 6831 6832/* Return 1 if the addresses in mem1 and mem2 are suitable for use in 6833 an ldd or std insn. 6834 6835 This can only happen when addr1 and addr2, the addresses in mem1 6836 and mem2, are consecutive memory locations (addr1 + 4 == addr2). 6837 addr1 must also be aligned on a 64-bit boundary. 6838 6839 Also iff dependent_reg_rtx is not null it should not be used to 6840 compute the address for mem1, i.e. we cannot optimize a sequence 6841 like: 6842 ld [%o0], %o0 6843 ld [%o0 + 4], %o1 6844 to 6845 ldd [%o0], %o0 6846 nor: 6847 ld [%g3 + 4], %g3 6848 ld [%g3], %g2 6849 to 6850 ldd [%g3], %g2 6851 6852 But, note that the transformation from: 6853 ld [%g2 + 4], %g3 6854 ld [%g2], %g2 6855 to 6856 ldd [%g2], %g2 6857 is perfectly fine. Thus, the peephole2 patterns always pass us 6858 the destination register of the first load, never the second one. 6859 6860 For stores we don't have a similar problem, so dependent_reg_rtx is 6861 NULL_RTX. */ 6862 6863int 6864mems_ok_for_ldd_peep (rtx mem1, rtx mem2, rtx dependent_reg_rtx) 6865{ 6866 rtx addr1, addr2; 6867 unsigned int reg1; 6868 HOST_WIDE_INT offset1; 6869 6870 /* The mems cannot be volatile. */ 6871 if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (mem1) || MEM_VOLATILE_P (mem2)) 6872 return 0; 6873 6874 /* MEM1 should be aligned on a 64-bit boundary. */ 6875 if (MEM_ALIGN (mem1) < 64) 6876 return 0; 6877 6878 addr1 = XEXP (mem1, 0); 6879 addr2 = XEXP (mem2, 0); 6880 6881 /* Extract a register number and offset (if used) from the first addr. */ 6882 if (GET_CODE (addr1) == PLUS) 6883 { 6884 /* If not a REG, return zero. */ 6885 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (addr1, 0)) != REG) 6886 return 0; 6887 else 6888 { 6889 reg1 = REGNO (XEXP (addr1, 0)); 6890 /* The offset must be constant! */ 6891 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (addr1, 1)) != CONST_INT) 6892 return 0; 6893 offset1 = INTVAL (XEXP (addr1, 1)); 6894 } 6895 } 6896 else if (GET_CODE (addr1) != REG) 6897 return 0; 6898 else 6899 { 6900 reg1 = REGNO (addr1); 6901 /* This was a simple (mem (reg)) expression. Offset is 0. */ 6902 offset1 = 0; 6903 } 6904 6905 /* Make sure the second address is a (mem (plus (reg) (const_int). */ 6906 if (GET_CODE (addr2) != PLUS) 6907 return 0; 6908 6909 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (addr2, 0)) != REG 6910 || GET_CODE (XEXP (addr2, 1)) != CONST_INT) 6911 return 0; 6912 6913 if (reg1 != REGNO (XEXP (addr2, 0))) 6914 return 0; 6915 6916 if (dependent_reg_rtx != NULL_RTX && reg1 == REGNO (dependent_reg_rtx)) 6917 return 0; 6918 6919 /* The first offset must be evenly divisible by 8 to ensure the 6920 address is 64 bit aligned. */ 6921 if (offset1 % 8 != 0) 6922 return 0; 6923 6924 /* The offset for the second addr must be 4 more than the first addr. */ 6925 if (INTVAL (XEXP (addr2, 1)) != offset1 + 4) 6926 return 0; 6927 6928 /* All the tests passed. addr1 and addr2 are valid for ldd and std 6929 instructions. */ 6930 return 1; 6931} 6932 6933/* Return 1 if reg is a pseudo, or is the first register in 6934 a hard register pair. This makes it suitable for use in 6935 ldd and std insns. */ 6936 6937int 6938register_ok_for_ldd (rtx reg) 6939{ 6940 /* We might have been passed a SUBREG. */ 6941 if (!REG_P (reg)) 6942 return 0; 6943 6944 if (REGNO (reg) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER) 6945 return (REGNO (reg) % 2 == 0); 6946 6947 return 1; 6948} 6949 6950/* Return 1 if OP is a memory whose address is known to be 6951 aligned to 8-byte boundary, or a pseudo during reload. 6952 This makes it suitable for use in ldd and std insns. */ 6953 6954int 6955memory_ok_for_ldd (rtx op) 6956{ 6957 if (MEM_P (op)) 6958 { 6959 /* In 64-bit mode, we assume that the address is word-aligned. */ 6960 if (TARGET_ARCH32 && !mem_min_alignment (op, 8)) 6961 return 0; 6962 6963 if ((reload_in_progress || reload_completed) 6964 && !strict_memory_address_p (Pmode, XEXP (op, 0))) 6965 return 0; 6966 } 6967 else if (REG_P (op) && REGNO (op) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER) 6968 { 6969 if (!(reload_in_progress && reg_renumber [REGNO (op)] < 0)) 6970 return 0; 6971 } 6972 else 6973 return 0; 6974 6975 return 1; 6976} 6977 6978/* Print operand X (an rtx) in assembler syntax to file FILE. 6979 CODE is a letter or dot (`z' in `%z0') or 0 if no letter was specified. 6980 For `%' followed by punctuation, CODE is the punctuation and X is null. */ 6981 6982void 6983print_operand (FILE *file, rtx x, int code) 6984{ 6985 switch (code) 6986 { 6987 case '#': 6988 /* Output an insn in a delay slot. */ 6989 if (final_sequence) 6990 sparc_indent_opcode = 1; 6991 else 6992 fputs ("\n\t nop", file); 6993 return; 6994 case '*': 6995 /* Output an annul flag if there's nothing for the delay slot and we 6996 are optimizing. This is always used with '(' below. 6997 Sun OS 4.1.1 dbx can't handle an annulled unconditional branch; 6998 this is a dbx bug. So, we only do this when optimizing. 6999 On UltraSPARC, a branch in a delay slot causes a pipeline flush. 7000 Always emit a nop in case the next instruction is a branch. */ 7001 if (! final_sequence && (optimize && (int)sparc_cpu < PROCESSOR_V9)) 7002 fputs (",a", file); 7003 return; 7004 case '(': 7005 /* Output a 'nop' if there's nothing for the delay slot and we are 7006 not optimizing. This is always used with '*' above. */ 7007 if (! final_sequence && ! (optimize && (int)sparc_cpu < PROCESSOR_V9)) 7008 fputs ("\n\t nop", file); 7009 else if (final_sequence) 7010 sparc_indent_opcode = 1; 7011 return; 7012 case ')': 7013 /* Output the right displacement from the saved PC on function return. 7014 The caller may have placed an "unimp" insn immediately after the call 7015 so we have to account for it. This insn is used in the 32-bit ABI 7016 when calling a function that returns a non zero-sized structure. The 7017 64-bit ABI doesn't have it. Be careful to have this test be the same 7018 as that for the call. The exception is when sparc_std_struct_return 7019 is enabled, the psABI is followed exactly and the adjustment is made 7020 by the code in sparc_struct_value_rtx. The call emitted is the same 7021 when sparc_std_struct_return is enabled. */ 7022 if (!TARGET_ARCH64 7023 && cfun->returns_struct 7024 && !sparc_std_struct_return 7025 && DECL_SIZE (DECL_RESULT (current_function_decl)) 7026 && TREE_CODE (DECL_SIZE (DECL_RESULT (current_function_decl))) 7027 == INTEGER_CST 7028 && !integer_zerop (DECL_SIZE (DECL_RESULT (current_function_decl)))) 7029 fputs ("12", file); 7030 else 7031 fputc ('8', file); 7032 return; 7033 case '_': 7034 /* Output the Embedded Medium/Anywhere code model base register. */ 7035 fputs (EMBMEDANY_BASE_REG, file); 7036 return; 7037 case '&': 7038 /* Print some local dynamic TLS name. */ 7039 assemble_name (file, get_some_local_dynamic_name ()); 7040 return; 7041 7042 case 'Y': 7043 /* Adjust the operand to take into account a RESTORE operation. */ 7044 if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST_INT) 7045 break; 7046 else if (GET_CODE (x) != REG) 7047 output_operand_lossage ("invalid %%Y operand"); 7048 else if (REGNO (x) < 8) 7049 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)], file); 7050 else if (REGNO (x) >= 24 && REGNO (x) < 32) 7051 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)-16], file); 7052 else 7053 output_operand_lossage ("invalid %%Y operand"); 7054 return; 7055 case 'L': 7056 /* Print out the low order register name of a register pair. */ 7057 if (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN) 7058 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)+1], file); 7059 else 7060 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)], file); 7061 return; 7062 case 'H': 7063 /* Print out the high order register name of a register pair. */ 7064 if (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN) 7065 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)], file); 7066 else 7067 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)+1], file); 7068 return; 7069 case 'R': 7070 /* Print out the second register name of a register pair or quad. 7071 I.e., R (%o0) => %o1. */ 7072 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)+1], file); 7073 return; 7074 case 'S': 7075 /* Print out the third register name of a register quad. 7076 I.e., S (%o0) => %o2. */ 7077 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)+2], file); 7078 return; 7079 case 'T': 7080 /* Print out the fourth register name of a register quad. 7081 I.e., T (%o0) => %o3. */ 7082 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)+3], file); 7083 return; 7084 case 'x': 7085 /* Print a condition code register. */ 7086 if (REGNO (x) == SPARC_ICC_REG) 7087 { 7088 /* We don't handle CC[X]_NOOVmode because they're not supposed 7089 to occur here. */ 7090 if (GET_MODE (x) == CCmode) 7091 fputs ("%icc", file); 7092 else if (GET_MODE (x) == CCXmode) 7093 fputs ("%xcc", file); 7094 else 7095 gcc_unreachable (); 7096 } 7097 else 7098 /* %fccN register */ 7099 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)], file); 7100 return; 7101 case 'm': 7102 /* Print the operand's address only. */ 7103 output_address (XEXP (x, 0)); 7104 return; 7105 case 'r': 7106 /* In this case we need a register. Use %g0 if the 7107 operand is const0_rtx. */ 7108 if (x == const0_rtx 7109 || (GET_MODE (x) != VOIDmode && x == CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (x)))) 7110 { 7111 fputs ("%g0", file); 7112 return; 7113 } 7114 else 7115 break; 7116 7117 case 'A': 7118 switch (GET_CODE (x)) 7119 { 7120 case IOR: fputs ("or", file); break; 7121 case AND: fputs ("and", file); break; 7122 case XOR: fputs ("xor", file); break; 7123 default: output_operand_lossage ("invalid %%A operand"); 7124 } 7125 return; 7126 7127 case 'B': 7128 switch (GET_CODE (x)) 7129 { 7130 case IOR: fputs ("orn", file); break; 7131 case AND: fputs ("andn", file); break; 7132 case XOR: fputs ("xnor", file); break; 7133 default: output_operand_lossage ("invalid %%B operand"); 7134 } 7135 return; 7136 7137 /* These are used by the conditional move instructions. */ 7138 case 'c' : 7139 case 'C': 7140 { 7141 enum rtx_code rc = GET_CODE (x); 7142 7143 if (code == 'c') 7144 { 7145 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)); 7146 if (mode == CCFPmode || mode == CCFPEmode) 7147 rc = reverse_condition_maybe_unordered (GET_CODE (x)); 7148 else 7149 rc = reverse_condition (GET_CODE (x)); 7150 } 7151 switch (rc) 7152 { 7153 case NE: fputs ("ne", file); break; 7154 case EQ: fputs ("e", file); break; 7155 case GE: fputs ("ge", file); break; 7156 case GT: fputs ("g", file); break; 7157 case LE: fputs ("le", file); break; 7158 case LT: fputs ("l", file); break; 7159 case GEU: fputs ("geu", file); break; 7160 case GTU: fputs ("gu", file); break; 7161 case LEU: fputs ("leu", file); break; 7162 case LTU: fputs ("lu", file); break; 7163 case LTGT: fputs ("lg", file); break; 7164 case UNORDERED: fputs ("u", file); break; 7165 case ORDERED: fputs ("o", file); break; 7166 case UNLT: fputs ("ul", file); break; 7167 case UNLE: fputs ("ule", file); break; 7168 case UNGT: fputs ("ug", file); break; 7169 case UNGE: fputs ("uge", file); break; 7170 case UNEQ: fputs ("ue", file); break; 7171 default: output_operand_lossage (code == 'c' 7172 ? "invalid %%c operand" 7173 : "invalid %%C operand"); 7174 } 7175 return; 7176 } 7177 7178 /* These are used by the movr instruction pattern. */ 7179 case 'd': 7180 case 'D': 7181 { 7182 enum rtx_code rc = (code == 'd' 7183 ? reverse_condition (GET_CODE (x)) 7184 : GET_CODE (x)); 7185 switch (rc) 7186 { 7187 case NE: fputs ("ne", file); break; 7188 case EQ: fputs ("e", file); break; 7189 case GE: fputs ("gez", file); break; 7190 case LT: fputs ("lz", file); break; 7191 case LE: fputs ("lez", file); break; 7192 case GT: fputs ("gz", file); break; 7193 default: output_operand_lossage (code == 'd' 7194 ? "invalid %%d operand" 7195 : "invalid %%D operand"); 7196 } 7197 return; 7198 } 7199 7200 case 'b': 7201 { 7202 /* Print a sign-extended character. */ 7203 int i = trunc_int_for_mode (INTVAL (x), QImode); 7204 fprintf (file, "%d", i); 7205 return; 7206 } 7207 7208 case 'f': 7209 /* Operand must be a MEM; write its address. */ 7210 if (GET_CODE (x) != MEM) 7211 output_operand_lossage ("invalid %%f operand"); 7212 output_address (XEXP (x, 0)); 7213 return; 7214 7215 case 's': 7216 { 7217 /* Print a sign-extended 32-bit value. */ 7218 HOST_WIDE_INT i; 7219 if (GET_CODE(x) == CONST_INT) 7220 i = INTVAL (x); 7221 else if (GET_CODE(x) == CONST_DOUBLE) 7222 i = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (x); 7223 else 7224 { 7225 output_operand_lossage ("invalid %%s operand"); 7226 return; 7227 } 7228 i = trunc_int_for_mode (i, SImode); 7229 fprintf (file, HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC, i); 7230 return; 7231 } 7232 7233 case 0: 7234 /* Do nothing special. */ 7235 break; 7236 7237 default: 7238 /* Undocumented flag. */ 7239 output_operand_lossage ("invalid operand output code"); 7240 } 7241 7242 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG) 7243 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)], file); 7244 else if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM) 7245 { 7246 fputc ('[', file); 7247 /* Poor Sun assembler doesn't understand absolute addressing. */ 7248 if (CONSTANT_P (XEXP (x, 0))) 7249 fputs ("%g0+", file); 7250 output_address (XEXP (x, 0)); 7251 fputc (']', file); 7252 } 7253 else if (GET_CODE (x) == HIGH) 7254 { 7255 fputs ("%hi(", file); 7256 output_addr_const (file, XEXP (x, 0)); 7257 fputc (')', file); 7258 } 7259 else if (GET_CODE (x) == LO_SUM) 7260 { 7261 print_operand (file, XEXP (x, 0), 0); 7262 if (TARGET_CM_MEDMID) 7263 fputs ("+%l44(", file); 7264 else 7265 fputs ("+%lo(", file); 7266 output_addr_const (file, XEXP (x, 1)); 7267 fputc (')', file); 7268 } 7269 else if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST_DOUBLE 7270 && (GET_MODE (x) == VOIDmode 7271 || GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) == MODE_INT)) 7272 { 7273 if (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (x) == 0) 7274 fprintf (file, "%u", (unsigned int) CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (x)); 7275 else if (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (x) == -1 7276 && CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (x) < 0) 7277 fprintf (file, "%d", (int) CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (x)); 7278 else 7279 output_operand_lossage ("long long constant not a valid immediate operand"); 7280 } 7281 else if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST_DOUBLE) 7282 output_operand_lossage ("floating point constant not a valid immediate operand"); 7283 else { output_addr_const (file, x); } 7284} 7285 7286/* Target hook for assembling integer objects. The sparc version has 7287 special handling for aligned DI-mode objects. */ 7288 7289static bool 7290sparc_assemble_integer (rtx x, unsigned int size, int aligned_p) 7291{ 7292 /* ??? We only output .xword's for symbols and only then in environments 7293 where the assembler can handle them. */ 7294 if (aligned_p && size == 8 7295 && (GET_CODE (x) != CONST_INT && GET_CODE (x) != CONST_DOUBLE)) 7296 { 7297 if (TARGET_V9) 7298 { 7299 assemble_integer_with_op ("\t.xword\t", x); 7300 return true; 7301 } 7302 else 7303 { 7304 assemble_aligned_integer (4, const0_rtx); 7305 assemble_aligned_integer (4, x); 7306 return true; 7307 } 7308 } 7309 return default_assemble_integer (x, size, aligned_p); 7310} 7311 7312/* Return the value of a code used in the .proc pseudo-op that says 7313 what kind of result this function returns. For non-C types, we pick 7314 the closest C type. */ 7315 7316#ifndef SHORT_TYPE_SIZE 7317#define SHORT_TYPE_SIZE (BITS_PER_UNIT * 2) 7318#endif 7319 7320#ifndef INT_TYPE_SIZE 7321#define INT_TYPE_SIZE BITS_PER_WORD 7322#endif 7323 7324#ifndef LONG_TYPE_SIZE 7325#define LONG_TYPE_SIZE BITS_PER_WORD 7326#endif 7327 7328#ifndef LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE 7329#define LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE (BITS_PER_WORD * 2) 7330#endif 7331 7332#ifndef FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE 7333#define FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE BITS_PER_WORD 7334#endif 7335 7336#ifndef DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE 7337#define DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE (BITS_PER_WORD * 2) 7338#endif 7339 7340#ifndef LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE 7341#define LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE (BITS_PER_WORD * 2) 7342#endif 7343 7344unsigned long 7345sparc_type_code (register tree type) 7346{ 7347 register unsigned long qualifiers = 0; 7348 register unsigned shift; 7349 7350 /* Only the first 30 bits of the qualifier are valid. We must refrain from 7351 setting more, since some assemblers will give an error for this. Also, 7352 we must be careful to avoid shifts of 32 bits or more to avoid getting 7353 unpredictable results. */ 7354 7355 for (shift = 6; shift < 30; shift += 2, type = TREE_TYPE (type)) 7356 { 7357 switch (TREE_CODE (type)) 7358 { 7359 case ERROR_MARK: 7360 return qualifiers; 7361 7362 case ARRAY_TYPE: 7363 qualifiers |= (3 << shift); 7364 break; 7365 7366 case FUNCTION_TYPE: 7367 case METHOD_TYPE: 7368 qualifiers |= (2 << shift); 7369 break; 7370 7371 case POINTER_TYPE: 7372 case REFERENCE_TYPE: 7373 case OFFSET_TYPE: 7374 qualifiers |= (1 << shift); 7375 break; 7376 7377 case RECORD_TYPE: 7378 return (qualifiers | 8); 7379 7380 case UNION_TYPE: 7381 case QUAL_UNION_TYPE: 7382 return (qualifiers | 9); 7383 7384 case ENUMERAL_TYPE: 7385 return (qualifiers | 10); 7386 7387 case VOID_TYPE: 7388 return (qualifiers | 16); 7389 7390 case INTEGER_TYPE: 7391 /* If this is a range type, consider it to be the underlying 7392 type. */ 7393 if (TREE_TYPE (type) != 0) 7394 break; 7395 7396 /* Carefully distinguish all the standard types of C, 7397 without messing up if the language is not C. We do this by 7398 testing TYPE_PRECISION and TYPE_UNSIGNED. The old code used to 7399 look at both the names and the above fields, but that's redundant. 7400 Any type whose size is between two C types will be considered 7401 to be the wider of the two types. Also, we do not have a 7402 special code to use for "long long", so anything wider than 7403 long is treated the same. Note that we can't distinguish 7404 between "int" and "long" in this code if they are the same 7405 size, but that's fine, since neither can the assembler. */ 7406 7407 if (TYPE_PRECISION (type) <= CHAR_TYPE_SIZE) 7408 return (qualifiers | (TYPE_UNSIGNED (type) ? 12 : 2)); 7409 7410 else if (TYPE_PRECISION (type) <= SHORT_TYPE_SIZE) 7411 return (qualifiers | (TYPE_UNSIGNED (type) ? 13 : 3)); 7412 7413 else if (TYPE_PRECISION (type) <= INT_TYPE_SIZE) 7414 return (qualifiers | (TYPE_UNSIGNED (type) ? 14 : 4)); 7415 7416 else 7417 return (qualifiers | (TYPE_UNSIGNED (type) ? 15 : 5)); 7418 7419 case REAL_TYPE: 7420 /* If this is a range type, consider it to be the underlying 7421 type. */ 7422 if (TREE_TYPE (type) != 0) 7423 break; 7424 7425 /* Carefully distinguish all the standard types of C, 7426 without messing up if the language is not C. */ 7427 7428 if (TYPE_PRECISION (type) == FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE) 7429 return (qualifiers | 6); 7430 7431 else 7432 return (qualifiers | 7); 7433 7434 case COMPLEX_TYPE: /* GNU Fortran COMPLEX type. */ 7435 /* ??? We need to distinguish between double and float complex types, 7436 but I don't know how yet because I can't reach this code from 7437 existing front-ends. */ 7438 return (qualifiers | 7); /* Who knows? */ 7439 7440 case VECTOR_TYPE: 7441 case BOOLEAN_TYPE: /* Boolean truth value type. */ 7442 case LANG_TYPE: /* ? */ 7443 return qualifiers; 7444 7445 default: 7446 gcc_unreachable (); /* Not a type! */ 7447 } 7448 } 7449 7450 return qualifiers; 7451} 7452 7453/* Nested function support. */ 7454 7455/* Emit RTL insns to initialize the variable parts of a trampoline. 7456 FNADDR is an RTX for the address of the function's pure code. 7457 CXT is an RTX for the static chain value for the function. 7458 7459 This takes 16 insns: 2 shifts & 2 ands (to split up addresses), 4 sethi 7460 (to load in opcodes), 4 iors (to merge address and opcodes), and 4 writes 7461 (to store insns). This is a bit excessive. Perhaps a different 7462 mechanism would be better here. 7463 7464 Emit enough FLUSH insns to synchronize the data and instruction caches. */ 7465 7466static void 7467sparc32_initialize_trampoline (rtx m_tramp, rtx fnaddr, rtx cxt) 7468{ 7469 /* SPARC 32-bit trampoline: 7470 7471 sethi %hi(fn), %g1 7472 sethi %hi(static), %g2 7473 jmp %g1+%lo(fn) 7474 or %g2, %lo(static), %g2 7475 7476 SETHI i,r = 00rr rrr1 00ii iiii iiii iiii iiii iiii 7477 JMPL r+i,d = 10dd ddd1 1100 0rrr rr1i iiii iiii iiii 7478 */ 7479 7480 emit_move_insn 7481 (adjust_address (m_tramp, SImode, 0), 7482 expand_binop (SImode, ior_optab, 7483 expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, SImode, fnaddr, 7484 size_int (10), 0, 1), 7485 GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0x03000000, SImode)), 7486 NULL_RTX, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT)); 7487 7488 emit_move_insn 7489 (adjust_address (m_tramp, SImode, 4), 7490 expand_binop (SImode, ior_optab, 7491 expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, SImode, cxt, 7492 size_int (10), 0, 1), 7493 GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0x05000000, SImode)), 7494 NULL_RTX, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT)); 7495 7496 emit_move_insn 7497 (adjust_address (m_tramp, SImode, 8), 7498 expand_binop (SImode, ior_optab, 7499 expand_and (SImode, fnaddr, GEN_INT (0x3ff), NULL_RTX), 7500 GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0x81c06000, SImode)), 7501 NULL_RTX, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT)); 7502 7503 emit_move_insn 7504 (adjust_address (m_tramp, SImode, 12), 7505 expand_binop (SImode, ior_optab, 7506 expand_and (SImode, cxt, GEN_INT (0x3ff), NULL_RTX), 7507 GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0x8410a000, SImode)), 7508 NULL_RTX, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT)); 7509 7510 /* On UltraSPARC a flush flushes an entire cache line. The trampoline is 7511 aligned on a 16 byte boundary so one flush clears it all. */ 7512 emit_insn (gen_flush (validize_mem (adjust_address (m_tramp, SImode, 0)))); 7513 if (sparc_cpu != PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC 7514 && sparc_cpu != PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3 7515 && sparc_cpu != PROCESSOR_NIAGARA 7516 && sparc_cpu != PROCESSOR_NIAGARA2) 7517 emit_insn (gen_flush (validize_mem (adjust_address (m_tramp, SImode, 8)))); 7518 7519 /* Call __enable_execute_stack after writing onto the stack to make sure 7520 the stack address is accessible. */ 7521#ifdef ENABLE_EXECUTE_STACK 7522 emit_library_call (gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, "__enable_execute_stack"), 7523 LCT_NORMAL, VOIDmode, 1, XEXP (m_tramp, 0), Pmode); 7524#endif 7525 7526} 7527 7528/* The 64-bit version is simpler because it makes more sense to load the 7529 values as "immediate" data out of the trampoline. It's also easier since 7530 we can read the PC without clobbering a register. */ 7531 7532static void 7533sparc64_initialize_trampoline (rtx m_tramp, rtx fnaddr, rtx cxt) 7534{ 7535 /* SPARC 64-bit trampoline: 7536 7537 rd %pc, %g1 7538 ldx [%g1+24], %g5 7539 jmp %g5 7540 ldx [%g1+16], %g5 7541 +16 bytes data 7542 */ 7543 7544 emit_move_insn (adjust_address (m_tramp, SImode, 0), 7545 GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0x83414000, SImode))); 7546 emit_move_insn (adjust_address (m_tramp, SImode, 4), 7547 GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0xca586018, SImode))); 7548 emit_move_insn (adjust_address (m_tramp, SImode, 8), 7549 GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0x81c14000, SImode))); 7550 emit_move_insn (adjust_address (m_tramp, SImode, 12), 7551 GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0xca586010, SImode))); 7552 emit_move_insn (adjust_address (m_tramp, DImode, 16), cxt); 7553 emit_move_insn (adjust_address (m_tramp, DImode, 24), fnaddr); 7554 emit_insn (gen_flushdi (validize_mem (adjust_address (m_tramp, DImode, 0)))); 7555 7556 if (sparc_cpu != PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC 7557 && sparc_cpu != PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3 7558 && sparc_cpu != PROCESSOR_NIAGARA 7559 && sparc_cpu != PROCESSOR_NIAGARA2) 7560 emit_insn (gen_flushdi (validize_mem (adjust_address (m_tramp, DImode, 8)))); 7561 7562 /* Call __enable_execute_stack after writing onto the stack to make sure 7563 the stack address is accessible. */ 7564#ifdef ENABLE_EXECUTE_STACK 7565 emit_library_call (gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, "__enable_execute_stack"), 7566 LCT_NORMAL, VOIDmode, 1, XEXP (m_tramp, 0), Pmode); 7567#endif 7568} 7569 7570/* Worker for TARGET_TRAMPOLINE_INIT. */ 7571 7572static void 7573sparc_trampoline_init (rtx m_tramp, tree fndecl, rtx cxt) 7574{ 7575 rtx fnaddr = force_reg (Pmode, XEXP (DECL_RTL (fndecl), 0)); 7576 cxt = force_reg (Pmode, cxt); 7577 if (TARGET_ARCH64) 7578 sparc64_initialize_trampoline (m_tramp, fnaddr, cxt); 7579 else 7580 sparc32_initialize_trampoline (m_tramp, fnaddr, cxt); 7581} 7582 7583/* Adjust the cost of a scheduling dependency. Return the new cost of 7584 a dependency LINK or INSN on DEP_INSN. COST is the current cost. */ 7585 7586static int 7587supersparc_adjust_cost (rtx insn, rtx link, rtx dep_insn, int cost) 7588{ 7589 enum attr_type insn_type; 7590 7591 if (! recog_memoized (insn)) 7592 return 0; 7593 7594 insn_type = get_attr_type (insn); 7595 7596 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link) == 0) 7597 { 7598 /* Data dependency; DEP_INSN writes a register that INSN reads some 7599 cycles later. */ 7600 7601 /* if a load, then the dependence must be on the memory address; 7602 add an extra "cycle". Note that the cost could be two cycles 7603 if the reg was written late in an instruction group; we ca not tell 7604 here. */ 7605 if (insn_type == TYPE_LOAD || insn_type == TYPE_FPLOAD) 7606 return cost + 3; 7607 7608 /* Get the delay only if the address of the store is the dependence. */ 7609 if (insn_type == TYPE_STORE || insn_type == TYPE_FPSTORE) 7610 { 7611 rtx pat = PATTERN(insn); 7612 rtx dep_pat = PATTERN (dep_insn); 7613 7614 if (GET_CODE (pat) != SET || GET_CODE (dep_pat) != SET) 7615 return cost; /* This should not happen! */ 7616 7617 /* The dependency between the two instructions was on the data that 7618 is being stored. Assume that this implies that the address of the 7619 store is not dependent. */ 7620 if (rtx_equal_p (SET_DEST (dep_pat), SET_SRC (pat))) 7621 return cost; 7622 7623 return cost + 3; /* An approximation. */ 7624 } 7625 7626 /* A shift instruction cannot receive its data from an instruction 7627 in the same cycle; add a one cycle penalty. */ 7628 if (insn_type == TYPE_SHIFT) 7629 return cost + 3; /* Split before cascade into shift. */ 7630 } 7631 else 7632 { 7633 /* Anti- or output- dependency; DEP_INSN reads/writes a register that 7634 INSN writes some cycles later. */ 7635 7636 /* These are only significant for the fpu unit; writing a fp reg before 7637 the fpu has finished with it stalls the processor. */ 7638 7639 /* Reusing an integer register causes no problems. */ 7640 if (insn_type == TYPE_IALU || insn_type == TYPE_SHIFT) 7641 return 0; 7642 } 7643 7644 return cost; 7645} 7646 7647static int 7648hypersparc_adjust_cost (rtx insn, rtx link, rtx dep_insn, int cost) 7649{ 7650 enum attr_type insn_type, dep_type; 7651 rtx pat = PATTERN(insn); 7652 rtx dep_pat = PATTERN (dep_insn); 7653 7654 if (recog_memoized (insn) < 0 || recog_memoized (dep_insn) < 0) 7655 return cost; 7656 7657 insn_type = get_attr_type (insn); 7658 dep_type = get_attr_type (dep_insn); 7659 7660 switch (REG_NOTE_KIND (link)) 7661 { 7662 case 0: 7663 /* Data dependency; DEP_INSN writes a register that INSN reads some 7664 cycles later. */ 7665 7666 switch (insn_type) 7667 { 7668 case TYPE_STORE: 7669 case TYPE_FPSTORE: 7670 /* Get the delay iff the address of the store is the dependence. */ 7671 if (GET_CODE (pat) != SET || GET_CODE (dep_pat) != SET) 7672 return cost; 7673 7674 if (rtx_equal_p (SET_DEST (dep_pat), SET_SRC (pat))) 7675 return cost; 7676 return cost + 3; 7677 7678 case TYPE_LOAD: 7679 case TYPE_SLOAD: 7680 case TYPE_FPLOAD: 7681 /* If a load, then the dependence must be on the memory address. If 7682 the addresses aren't equal, then it might be a false dependency */ 7683 if (dep_type == TYPE_STORE || dep_type == TYPE_FPSTORE) 7684 { 7685 if (GET_CODE (pat) != SET || GET_CODE (dep_pat) != SET 7686 || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (dep_pat)) != MEM 7687 || GET_CODE (SET_SRC (pat)) != MEM 7688 || ! rtx_equal_p (XEXP (SET_DEST (dep_pat), 0), 7689 XEXP (SET_SRC (pat), 0))) 7690 return cost + 2; 7691 7692 return cost + 8; 7693 } 7694 break; 7695 7696 case TYPE_BRANCH: 7697 /* Compare to branch latency is 0. There is no benefit from 7698 separating compare and branch. */ 7699 if (dep_type == TYPE_COMPARE) 7700 return 0; 7701 /* Floating point compare to branch latency is less than 7702 compare to conditional move. */ 7703 if (dep_type == TYPE_FPCMP) 7704 return cost - 1; 7705 break; 7706 default: 7707 break; 7708 } 7709 break; 7710 7711 case REG_DEP_ANTI: 7712 /* Anti-dependencies only penalize the fpu unit. */ 7713 if (insn_type == TYPE_IALU || insn_type == TYPE_SHIFT) 7714 return 0; 7715 break; 7716 7717 default: 7718 break; 7719 } 7720 7721 return cost; 7722} 7723 7724static int 7725sparc_adjust_cost(rtx insn, rtx link, rtx dep, int cost) 7726{ 7727 switch (sparc_cpu) 7728 { 7729 case PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC: 7730 cost = supersparc_adjust_cost (insn, link, dep, cost); 7731 break; 7732 case PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC: 7733 case PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X: 7734 cost = hypersparc_adjust_cost (insn, link, dep, cost); 7735 break; 7736 default: 7737 break; 7738 } 7739 return cost; 7740} 7741 7742static void 7743sparc_sched_init (FILE *dump ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, 7744 int sched_verbose ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, 7745 int max_ready ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED) 7746{} 7747 7748static int 7749sparc_use_sched_lookahead (void) 7750{ 7751 if (sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_NIAGARA 7752 || sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_NIAGARA2) 7753 return 0; 7754 if (sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC 7755 || sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3) 7756 return 4; 7757 if ((1 << sparc_cpu) & 7758 ((1 << PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC) | (1 << PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC) | 7759 (1 << PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X))) 7760 return 3; 7761 return 0; 7762} 7763 7764static int 7765sparc_issue_rate (void) 7766{ 7767 switch (sparc_cpu) 7768 { 7769 case PROCESSOR_NIAGARA: 7770 case PROCESSOR_NIAGARA2: 7771 default: 7772 return 1; 7773 case PROCESSOR_V9: 7774 /* Assume V9 processors are capable of at least dual-issue. */ 7775 return 2; 7776 case PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC: 7777 return 3; 7778 case PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC: 7779 case PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X: 7780 return 2; 7781 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC: 7782 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3: 7783 return 4; 7784 } 7785} 7786 7787static int 7788set_extends (rtx insn) 7789{ 7790 register rtx pat = PATTERN (insn); 7791 7792 switch (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (pat))) 7793 { 7794 /* Load and some shift instructions zero extend. */ 7795 case MEM: 7796 case ZERO_EXTEND: 7797 /* sethi clears the high bits */ 7798 case HIGH: 7799 /* LO_SUM is used with sethi. sethi cleared the high 7800 bits and the values used with lo_sum are positive */ 7801 case LO_SUM: 7802 /* Store flag stores 0 or 1 */ 7803 case LT: case LTU: 7804 case GT: case GTU: 7805 case LE: case LEU: 7806 case GE: case GEU: 7807 case EQ: 7808 case NE: 7809 return 1; 7810 case AND: 7811 { 7812 rtx op0 = XEXP (SET_SRC (pat), 0); 7813 rtx op1 = XEXP (SET_SRC (pat), 1); 7814 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT) 7815 return INTVAL (op1) >= 0; 7816 if (GET_CODE (op0) != REG) 7817 return 0; 7818 if (sparc_check_64 (op0, insn) == 1) 7819 return 1; 7820 return (GET_CODE (op1) == REG && sparc_check_64 (op1, insn) == 1); 7821 } 7822 case IOR: 7823 case XOR: 7824 { 7825 rtx op0 = XEXP (SET_SRC (pat), 0); 7826 rtx op1 = XEXP (SET_SRC (pat), 1); 7827 if (GET_CODE (op0) != REG || sparc_check_64 (op0, insn) <= 0) 7828 return 0; 7829 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT) 7830 return INTVAL (op1) >= 0; 7831 return (GET_CODE (op1) == REG && sparc_check_64 (op1, insn) == 1); 7832 } 7833 case LSHIFTRT: 7834 return GET_MODE (SET_SRC (pat)) == SImode; 7835 /* Positive integers leave the high bits zero. */ 7836 case CONST_DOUBLE: 7837 return ! (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (SET_SRC (pat)) & 0x80000000); 7838 case CONST_INT: 7839 return ! (INTVAL (SET_SRC (pat)) & 0x80000000); 7840 case ASHIFTRT: 7841 case SIGN_EXTEND: 7842 return - (GET_MODE (SET_SRC (pat)) == SImode); 7843 case REG: 7844 return sparc_check_64 (SET_SRC (pat), insn); 7845 default: 7846 return 0; 7847 } 7848} 7849 7850/* We _ought_ to have only one kind per function, but... */ 7851static GTY(()) rtx sparc_addr_diff_list; 7852static GTY(()) rtx sparc_addr_list; 7853 7854void 7855sparc_defer_case_vector (rtx lab, rtx vec, int diff) 7856{ 7857 vec = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, lab, vec); 7858 if (diff) 7859 sparc_addr_diff_list 7860 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, vec, sparc_addr_diff_list); 7861 else 7862 sparc_addr_list = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, vec, sparc_addr_list); 7863} 7864 7865static void 7866sparc_output_addr_vec (rtx vec) 7867{ 7868 rtx lab = XEXP (vec, 0), body = XEXP (vec, 1); 7869 int idx, vlen = XVECLEN (body, 0); 7870 7871#ifdef ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_START 7872 ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_START (asm_out_file); 7873#endif 7874 7875#ifdef ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL 7876 ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL (asm_out_file, "L", CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (lab), 7877 NEXT_INSN (lab)); 7878#else 7879 (*targetm.asm_out.internal_label) (asm_out_file, "L", CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (lab)); 7880#endif 7881 7882 for (idx = 0; idx < vlen; idx++) 7883 { 7884 ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT 7885 (asm_out_file, CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (XEXP (XVECEXP (body, 0, idx), 0))); 7886 } 7887 7888#ifdef ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_END 7889 ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_END (asm_out_file); 7890#endif 7891} 7892 7893static void 7894sparc_output_addr_diff_vec (rtx vec) 7895{ 7896 rtx lab = XEXP (vec, 0), body = XEXP (vec, 1); 7897 rtx base = XEXP (XEXP (body, 0), 0); 7898 int idx, vlen = XVECLEN (body, 1); 7899 7900#ifdef ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_START 7901 ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_START (asm_out_file); 7902#endif 7903 7904#ifdef ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL 7905 ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL (asm_out_file, "L", CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (lab), 7906 NEXT_INSN (lab)); 7907#else 7908 (*targetm.asm_out.internal_label) (asm_out_file, "L", CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (lab)); 7909#endif 7910 7911 for (idx = 0; idx < vlen; idx++) 7912 { 7913 ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT 7914 (asm_out_file, 7915 body, 7916 CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (XEXP (XVECEXP (body, 1, idx), 0)), 7917 CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (base)); 7918 } 7919 7920#ifdef ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_END 7921 ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_END (asm_out_file); 7922#endif 7923} 7924 7925static void 7926sparc_output_deferred_case_vectors (void) 7927{ 7928 rtx t; 7929 int align; 7930 7931 if (sparc_addr_list == NULL_RTX 7932 && sparc_addr_diff_list == NULL_RTX) 7933 return; 7934 7935 /* Align to cache line in the function's code section. */ 7936 switch_to_section (current_function_section ()); 7937 7938 align = floor_log2 (FUNCTION_BOUNDARY / BITS_PER_UNIT); 7939 if (align > 0) 7940 ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN (asm_out_file, align); 7941 7942 for (t = sparc_addr_list; t ; t = XEXP (t, 1)) 7943 sparc_output_addr_vec (XEXP (t, 0)); 7944 for (t = sparc_addr_diff_list; t ; t = XEXP (t, 1)) 7945 sparc_output_addr_diff_vec (XEXP (t, 0)); 7946 7947 sparc_addr_list = sparc_addr_diff_list = NULL_RTX; 7948} 7949 7950/* Return 0 if the high 32 bits of X (the low word of X, if DImode) are 7951 unknown. Return 1 if the high bits are zero, -1 if the register is 7952 sign extended. */ 7953int 7954sparc_check_64 (rtx x, rtx insn) 7955{ 7956 /* If a register is set only once it is safe to ignore insns this 7957 code does not know how to handle. The loop will either recognize 7958 the single set and return the correct value or fail to recognize 7959 it and return 0. */ 7960 int set_once = 0; 7961 rtx y = x; 7962 7963 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (x) == REG); 7964 7965 if (GET_MODE (x) == DImode) 7966 y = gen_rtx_REG (SImode, REGNO (x) + WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN); 7967 7968 if (flag_expensive_optimizations 7969 && df && DF_REG_DEF_COUNT (REGNO (y)) == 1) 7970 set_once = 1; 7971 7972 if (insn == 0) 7973 { 7974 if (set_once) 7975 insn = get_last_insn_anywhere (); 7976 else 7977 return 0; 7978 } 7979 7980 while ((insn = PREV_INSN (insn))) 7981 { 7982 switch (GET_CODE (insn)) 7983 { 7984 case JUMP_INSN: 7985 case NOTE: 7986 break; 7987 case CODE_LABEL: 7988 case CALL_INSN: 7989 default: 7990 if (! set_once) 7991 return 0; 7992 break; 7993 case INSN: 7994 { 7995 rtx pat = PATTERN (insn); 7996 if (GET_CODE (pat) != SET) 7997 return 0; 7998 if (rtx_equal_p (x, SET_DEST (pat))) 7999 return set_extends (insn); 8000 if (y && rtx_equal_p (y, SET_DEST (pat))) 8001 return set_extends (insn); 8002 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (SET_DEST (pat), y)) 8003 return 0; 8004 } 8005 } 8006 } 8007 return 0; 8008} 8009 8010/* Returns assembly code to perform a DImode shift using 8011 a 64-bit global or out register on SPARC-V8+. */ 8012const char * 8013output_v8plus_shift (rtx *operands, rtx insn, const char *opcode) 8014{ 8015 static char asm_code[60]; 8016 8017 /* The scratch register is only required when the destination 8018 register is not a 64-bit global or out register. */ 8019 if (which_alternative != 2) 8020 operands[3] = operands[0]; 8021 8022 /* We can only shift by constants <= 63. */ 8023 if (GET_CODE (operands[2]) == CONST_INT) 8024 operands[2] = GEN_INT (INTVAL (operands[2]) & 0x3f); 8025 8026 if (GET_CODE (operands[1]) == CONST_INT) 8027 { 8028 output_asm_insn ("mov\t%1, %3", operands); 8029 } 8030 else 8031 { 8032 output_asm_insn ("sllx\t%H1, 32, %3", operands); 8033 if (sparc_check_64 (operands[1], insn) <= 0) 8034 output_asm_insn ("srl\t%L1, 0, %L1", operands); 8035 output_asm_insn ("or\t%L1, %3, %3", operands); 8036 } 8037 8038 strcpy(asm_code, opcode); 8039 8040 if (which_alternative != 2) 8041 return strcat (asm_code, "\t%0, %2, %L0\n\tsrlx\t%L0, 32, %H0"); 8042 else 8043 return strcat (asm_code, "\t%3, %2, %3\n\tsrlx\t%3, 32, %H0\n\tmov\t%3, %L0"); 8044} 8045 8046/* Output rtl to increment the profiler label LABELNO 8047 for profiling a function entry. */ 8048 8049void 8050sparc_profile_hook (int labelno) 8051{ 8052 char buf[32]; 8053 rtx lab, fun; 8054 8055 fun = gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, MCOUNT_FUNCTION); 8056 if (NO_PROFILE_COUNTERS) 8057 { 8058 emit_library_call (fun, LCT_NORMAL, VOIDmode, 0); 8059 } 8060 else 8061 { 8062 ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (buf, "LP", labelno); 8063 lab = gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, ggc_strdup (buf)); 8064 emit_library_call (fun, LCT_NORMAL, VOIDmode, 1, lab, Pmode); 8065 } 8066} 8067 8068/* Solaris implementation of TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION. */ 8069 8070static void 8071sparc_solaris_elf_asm_named_section (const char *name, unsigned int flags, 8072 tree decl ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED) 8073{ 8074 fprintf (asm_out_file, "\t.section\t\"%s\"", name); 8075 8076 if (!(flags & SECTION_DEBUG)) 8077 fputs (",#alloc", asm_out_file); 8078 if (flags & SECTION_WRITE) 8079 fputs (",#write", asm_out_file); 8080 if (flags & SECTION_TLS) 8081 fputs (",#tls", asm_out_file); 8082 if (flags & SECTION_CODE) 8083 fputs (",#execinstr", asm_out_file); 8084 8085 /* ??? Handle SECTION_BSS. */ 8086 8087 fputc ('\n', asm_out_file); 8088} 8089 8090/* We do not allow indirect calls to be optimized into sibling calls. 8091 8092 We cannot use sibling calls when delayed branches are disabled 8093 because they will likely require the call delay slot to be filled. 8094 8095 Also, on SPARC 32-bit we cannot emit a sibling call when the 8096 current function returns a structure. This is because the "unimp 8097 after call" convention would cause the callee to return to the 8098 wrong place. The generic code already disallows cases where the 8099 function being called returns a structure. 8100 8101 It may seem strange how this last case could occur. Usually there 8102 is code after the call which jumps to epilogue code which dumps the 8103 return value into the struct return area. That ought to invalidate 8104 the sibling call right? Well, in the C++ case we can end up passing 8105 the pointer to the struct return area to a constructor (which returns 8106 void) and then nothing else happens. Such a sibling call would look 8107 valid without the added check here. 8108 8109 VxWorks PIC PLT entries require the global pointer to be initialized 8110 on entry. We therefore can't emit sibling calls to them. */ 8111static bool 8112sparc_function_ok_for_sibcall (tree decl, tree exp ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED) 8113{ 8114 return (decl 8115 && flag_delayed_branch 8116 && (TARGET_ARCH64 || ! cfun->returns_struct) 8117 && !(TARGET_VXWORKS_RTP 8118 && flag_pic 8119 && !targetm.binds_local_p (decl))); 8120} 8121 8122/* libfunc renaming. */ 8123#include "config/gofast.h" 8124 8125static void 8126sparc_init_libfuncs (void) 8127{ 8128 if (TARGET_ARCH32) 8129 { 8130 /* Use the subroutines that Sun's library provides for integer 8131 multiply and divide. The `*' prevents an underscore from 8132 being prepended by the compiler. .umul is a little faster 8133 than .mul. */ 8134 set_optab_libfunc (smul_optab, SImode, "*.umul"); 8135 set_optab_libfunc (sdiv_optab, SImode, "*.div"); 8136 set_optab_libfunc (udiv_optab, SImode, "*.udiv"); 8137 set_optab_libfunc (smod_optab, SImode, "*.rem"); 8138 set_optab_libfunc (umod_optab, SImode, "*.urem"); 8139 8140 /* TFmode arithmetic. These names are part of the SPARC 32bit ABI. */ 8141 set_optab_libfunc (add_optab, TFmode, "_Q_add"); 8142 set_optab_libfunc (sub_optab, TFmode, "_Q_sub"); 8143 set_optab_libfunc (neg_optab, TFmode, "_Q_neg"); 8144 set_optab_libfunc (smul_optab, TFmode, "_Q_mul"); 8145 set_optab_libfunc (sdiv_optab, TFmode, "_Q_div"); 8146 8147 /* We can define the TFmode sqrt optab only if TARGET_FPU. This 8148 is because with soft-float, the SFmode and DFmode sqrt 8149 instructions will be absent, and the compiler will notice and 8150 try to use the TFmode sqrt instruction for calls to the 8151 builtin function sqrt, but this fails. */ 8152 if (TARGET_FPU) 8153 set_optab_libfunc (sqrt_optab, TFmode, "_Q_sqrt"); 8154 8155 set_optab_libfunc (eq_optab, TFmode, "_Q_feq"); 8156 set_optab_libfunc (ne_optab, TFmode, "_Q_fne"); 8157 set_optab_libfunc (gt_optab, TFmode, "_Q_fgt"); 8158 set_optab_libfunc (ge_optab, TFmode, "_Q_fge"); 8159 set_optab_libfunc (lt_optab, TFmode, "_Q_flt"); 8160 set_optab_libfunc (le_optab, TFmode, "_Q_fle"); 8161 8162 set_conv_libfunc (sext_optab, TFmode, SFmode, "_Q_stoq"); 8163 set_conv_libfunc (sext_optab, TFmode, DFmode, "_Q_dtoq"); 8164 set_conv_libfunc (trunc_optab, SFmode, TFmode, "_Q_qtos"); 8165 set_conv_libfunc (trunc_optab, DFmode, TFmode, "_Q_qtod"); 8166 8167 set_conv_libfunc (sfix_optab, SImode, TFmode, "_Q_qtoi"); 8168 set_conv_libfunc (ufix_optab, SImode, TFmode, "_Q_qtou"); 8169 set_conv_libfunc (sfloat_optab, TFmode, SImode, "_Q_itoq"); 8170 set_conv_libfunc (ufloat_optab, TFmode, SImode, "_Q_utoq"); 8171 8172 if (DITF_CONVERSION_LIBFUNCS) 8173 { 8174 set_conv_libfunc (sfix_optab, DImode, TFmode, "_Q_qtoll"); 8175 set_conv_libfunc (ufix_optab, DImode, TFmode, "_Q_qtoull"); 8176 set_conv_libfunc (sfloat_optab, TFmode, DImode, "_Q_lltoq"); 8177 set_conv_libfunc (ufloat_optab, TFmode, DImode, "_Q_ulltoq"); 8178 } 8179 8180 if (SUN_CONVERSION_LIBFUNCS) 8181 { 8182 set_conv_libfunc (sfix_optab, DImode, SFmode, "__ftoll"); 8183 set_conv_libfunc (ufix_optab, DImode, SFmode, "__ftoull"); 8184 set_conv_libfunc (sfix_optab, DImode, DFmode, "__dtoll"); 8185 set_conv_libfunc (ufix_optab, DImode, DFmode, "__dtoull"); 8186 } 8187 } 8188 if (TARGET_ARCH64) 8189 { 8190 /* In the SPARC 64bit ABI, SImode multiply and divide functions 8191 do not exist in the library. Make sure the compiler does not 8192 emit calls to them by accident. (It should always use the 8193 hardware instructions.) */ 8194 set_optab_libfunc (smul_optab, SImode, 0); 8195 set_optab_libfunc (sdiv_optab, SImode, 0); 8196 set_optab_libfunc (udiv_optab, SImode, 0); 8197 set_optab_libfunc (smod_optab, SImode, 0); 8198 set_optab_libfunc (umod_optab, SImode, 0); 8199 8200 if (SUN_INTEGER_MULTIPLY_64) 8201 { 8202 set_optab_libfunc (smul_optab, DImode, "__mul64"); 8203 set_optab_libfunc (sdiv_optab, DImode, "__div64"); 8204 set_optab_libfunc (udiv_optab, DImode, "__udiv64"); 8205 set_optab_libfunc (smod_optab, DImode, "__rem64"); 8206 set_optab_libfunc (umod_optab, DImode, "__urem64"); 8207 } 8208 8209 if (SUN_CONVERSION_LIBFUNCS) 8210 { 8211 set_conv_libfunc (sfix_optab, DImode, SFmode, "__ftol"); 8212 set_conv_libfunc (ufix_optab, DImode, SFmode, "__ftoul"); 8213 set_conv_libfunc (sfix_optab, DImode, DFmode, "__dtol"); 8214 set_conv_libfunc (ufix_optab, DImode, DFmode, "__dtoul"); 8215 } 8216 } 8217 8218 gofast_maybe_init_libfuncs (); 8219} 8220 8221#define def_builtin(NAME, CODE, TYPE) \ 8222 add_builtin_function((NAME), (TYPE), (CODE), BUILT_IN_MD, NULL, \ 8223 NULL_TREE) 8224 8225/* Implement the TARGET_INIT_BUILTINS target hook. 8226 Create builtin functions for special SPARC instructions. */ 8227 8228static void 8229sparc_init_builtins (void) 8230{ 8231 if (TARGET_VIS) 8232 sparc_vis_init_builtins (); 8233} 8234 8235/* Create builtin functions for VIS 1.0 instructions. */ 8236 8237static void 8238sparc_vis_init_builtins (void) 8239{ 8240 tree v4qi = build_vector_type (unsigned_intQI_type_node, 4); 8241 tree v8qi = build_vector_type (unsigned_intQI_type_node, 8); 8242 tree v4hi = build_vector_type (intHI_type_node, 4); 8243 tree v2hi = build_vector_type (intHI_type_node, 2); 8244 tree v2si = build_vector_type (intSI_type_node, 2); 8245 8246 tree v4qi_ftype_v4hi = build_function_type_list (v4qi, v4hi, 0); 8247 tree v8qi_ftype_v2si_v8qi = build_function_type_list (v8qi, v2si, v8qi, 0); 8248 tree v2hi_ftype_v2si = build_function_type_list (v2hi, v2si, 0); 8249 tree v4hi_ftype_v4qi = build_function_type_list (v4hi, v4qi, 0); 8250 tree v8qi_ftype_v4qi_v4qi = build_function_type_list (v8qi, v4qi, v4qi, 0); 8251 tree v4hi_ftype_v4qi_v4hi = build_function_type_list (v4hi, v4qi, v4hi, 0); 8252 tree v4hi_ftype_v4qi_v2hi = build_function_type_list (v4hi, v4qi, v2hi, 0); 8253 tree v2si_ftype_v4qi_v2hi = build_function_type_list (v2si, v4qi, v2hi, 0); 8254 tree v4hi_ftype_v8qi_v4hi = build_function_type_list (v4hi, v8qi, v4hi, 0); 8255 tree v4hi_ftype_v4hi_v4hi = build_function_type_list (v4hi, v4hi, v4hi, 0); 8256 tree v2si_ftype_v2si_v2si = build_function_type_list (v2si, v2si, v2si, 0); 8257 tree v8qi_ftype_v8qi_v8qi = build_function_type_list (v8qi, v8qi, v8qi, 0); 8258 tree di_ftype_v8qi_v8qi_di = build_function_type_list (intDI_type_node, 8259 v8qi, v8qi, 8260 intDI_type_node, 0); 8261 tree di_ftype_di_di = build_function_type_list (intDI_type_node, 8262 intDI_type_node, 8263 intDI_type_node, 0); 8264 tree ptr_ftype_ptr_si = build_function_type_list (ptr_type_node, 8265 ptr_type_node, 8266 intSI_type_node, 0); 8267 tree ptr_ftype_ptr_di = build_function_type_list (ptr_type_node, 8268 ptr_type_node, 8269 intDI_type_node, 0); 8270 8271 /* Packing and expanding vectors. */ 8272 def_builtin ("__builtin_vis_fpack16", CODE_FOR_fpack16_vis, v4qi_ftype_v4hi); 8273 def_builtin ("__builtin_vis_fpack32", CODE_FOR_fpack32_vis, 8274 v8qi_ftype_v2si_v8qi); 8275 def_builtin ("__builtin_vis_fpackfix", CODE_FOR_fpackfix_vis, 8276 v2hi_ftype_v2si); 8277 def_builtin ("__builtin_vis_fexpand", CODE_FOR_fexpand_vis, v4hi_ftype_v4qi); 8278 def_builtin ("__builtin_vis_fpmerge", CODE_FOR_fpmerge_vis, 8279 v8qi_ftype_v4qi_v4qi); 8280 8281 /* Multiplications. */ 8282 def_builtin ("__builtin_vis_fmul8x16", CODE_FOR_fmul8x16_vis, 8283 v4hi_ftype_v4qi_v4hi); 8284 def_builtin ("__builtin_vis_fmul8x16au", CODE_FOR_fmul8x16au_vis, 8285 v4hi_ftype_v4qi_v2hi); 8286 def_builtin ("__builtin_vis_fmul8x16al", CODE_FOR_fmul8x16al_vis, 8287 v4hi_ftype_v4qi_v2hi); 8288 def_builtin ("__builtin_vis_fmul8sux16", CODE_FOR_fmul8sux16_vis, 8289 v4hi_ftype_v8qi_v4hi); 8290 def_builtin ("__builtin_vis_fmul8ulx16", CODE_FOR_fmul8ulx16_vis, 8291 v4hi_ftype_v8qi_v4hi); 8292 def_builtin ("__builtin_vis_fmuld8sux16", CODE_FOR_fmuld8sux16_vis, 8293 v2si_ftype_v4qi_v2hi); 8294 def_builtin ("__builtin_vis_fmuld8ulx16", CODE_FOR_fmuld8ulx16_vis, 8295 v2si_ftype_v4qi_v2hi); 8296 8297 /* Data aligning. */ 8298 def_builtin ("__builtin_vis_faligndatav4hi", CODE_FOR_faligndatav4hi_vis, 8299 v4hi_ftype_v4hi_v4hi); 8300 def_builtin ("__builtin_vis_faligndatav8qi", CODE_FOR_faligndatav8qi_vis, 8301 v8qi_ftype_v8qi_v8qi); 8302 def_builtin ("__builtin_vis_faligndatav2si", CODE_FOR_faligndatav2si_vis, 8303 v2si_ftype_v2si_v2si); 8304 def_builtin ("__builtin_vis_faligndatadi", CODE_FOR_faligndatadi_vis, 8305 di_ftype_di_di); 8306 if (TARGET_ARCH64) 8307 def_builtin ("__builtin_vis_alignaddr", CODE_FOR_alignaddrdi_vis, 8308 ptr_ftype_ptr_di); 8309 else 8310 def_builtin ("__builtin_vis_alignaddr", CODE_FOR_alignaddrsi_vis, 8311 ptr_ftype_ptr_si); 8312 8313 /* Pixel distance. */ 8314 def_builtin ("__builtin_vis_pdist", CODE_FOR_pdist_vis, 8315 di_ftype_v8qi_v8qi_di); 8316} 8317 8318/* Handle TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN target hook. 8319 Expand builtin functions for sparc intrinsics. */ 8320 8321static rtx 8322sparc_expand_builtin (tree exp, rtx target, 8323 rtx subtarget ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, 8324 enum machine_mode tmode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, 8325 int ignore ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED) 8326{ 8327 tree arg; 8328 call_expr_arg_iterator iter; 8329 tree fndecl = TREE_OPERAND (CALL_EXPR_FN (exp), 0); 8330 unsigned int icode = DECL_FUNCTION_CODE (fndecl); 8331 rtx pat, op[4]; 8332 enum machine_mode mode[4]; 8333 int arg_count = 0; 8334 8335 mode[0] = insn_data[icode].operand[0].mode; 8336 if (!target 8337 || GET_MODE (target) != mode[0] 8338 || ! (*insn_data[icode].operand[0].predicate) (target, mode[0])) 8339 op[0] = gen_reg_rtx (mode[0]); 8340 else 8341 op[0] = target; 8342 8343 FOR_EACH_CALL_EXPR_ARG (arg, iter, exp) 8344 { 8345 arg_count++; 8346 mode[arg_count] = insn_data[icode].operand[arg_count].mode; 8347 op[arg_count] = expand_normal (arg); 8348 8349 if (! (*insn_data[icode].operand[arg_count].predicate) (op[arg_count], 8350 mode[arg_count])) 8351 op[arg_count] = copy_to_mode_reg (mode[arg_count], op[arg_count]); 8352 } 8353 8354 switch (arg_count) 8355 { 8356 case 1: 8357 pat = GEN_FCN (icode) (op[0], op[1]); 8358 break; 8359 case 2: 8360 pat = GEN_FCN (icode) (op[0], op[1], op[2]); 8361 break; 8362 case 3: 8363 pat = GEN_FCN (icode) (op[0], op[1], op[2], op[3]); 8364 break; 8365 default: 8366 gcc_unreachable (); 8367 } 8368 8369 if (!pat) 8370 return NULL_RTX; 8371 8372 emit_insn (pat); 8373 8374 return op[0]; 8375} 8376 8377static int 8378sparc_vis_mul8x16 (int e8, int e16) 8379{ 8380 return (e8 * e16 + 128) / 256; 8381} 8382 8383/* Multiply the vector elements in ELTS0 to the elements in ELTS1 as specified 8384 by FNCODE. All of the elements in ELTS0 and ELTS1 lists must be integer 8385 constants. A tree list with the results of the multiplications is returned, 8386 and each element in the list is of INNER_TYPE. */ 8387 8388static tree 8389sparc_handle_vis_mul8x16 (int fncode, tree inner_type, tree elts0, tree elts1) 8390{ 8391 tree n_elts = NULL_TREE; 8392 int scale; 8393 8394 switch (fncode) 8395 { 8396 case CODE_FOR_fmul8x16_vis: 8397 for (; elts0 && elts1; 8398 elts0 = TREE_CHAIN (elts0), elts1 = TREE_CHAIN (elts1)) 8399 { 8400 int val 8401 = sparc_vis_mul8x16 (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_VALUE (elts0)), 8402 TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_VALUE (elts1))); 8403 n_elts = tree_cons (NULL_TREE, 8404 build_int_cst (inner_type, val), 8405 n_elts); 8406 } 8407 break; 8408 8409 case CODE_FOR_fmul8x16au_vis: 8410 scale = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_VALUE (elts1)); 8411 8412 for (; elts0; elts0 = TREE_CHAIN (elts0)) 8413 { 8414 int val 8415 = sparc_vis_mul8x16 (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_VALUE (elts0)), 8416 scale); 8417 n_elts = tree_cons (NULL_TREE, 8418 build_int_cst (inner_type, val), 8419 n_elts); 8420 } 8421 break; 8422 8423 case CODE_FOR_fmul8x16al_vis: 8424 scale = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_VALUE (TREE_CHAIN (elts1))); 8425 8426 for (; elts0; elts0 = TREE_CHAIN (elts0)) 8427 { 8428 int val 8429 = sparc_vis_mul8x16 (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_VALUE (elts0)), 8430 scale); 8431 n_elts = tree_cons (NULL_TREE, 8432 build_int_cst (inner_type, val), 8433 n_elts); 8434 } 8435 break; 8436 8437 default: 8438 gcc_unreachable (); 8439 } 8440 8441 return nreverse (n_elts); 8442 8443} 8444/* Handle TARGET_FOLD_BUILTIN target hook. 8445 Fold builtin functions for SPARC intrinsics. If IGNORE is true the 8446 result of the function call is ignored. NULL_TREE is returned if the 8447 function could not be folded. */ 8448 8449static tree 8450sparc_fold_builtin (tree fndecl, tree arglist, bool ignore) 8451{ 8452 tree arg0, arg1, arg2; 8453 tree rtype = TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (fndecl)); 8454 enum insn_code icode = (enum insn_code) DECL_FUNCTION_CODE (fndecl); 8455 8456 if (ignore 8457 && icode != CODE_FOR_alignaddrsi_vis 8458 && icode != CODE_FOR_alignaddrdi_vis) 8459 return fold_convert (rtype, integer_zero_node); 8460 8461 switch (icode) 8462 { 8463 case CODE_FOR_fexpand_vis: 8464 arg0 = TREE_VALUE (arglist); 8465 STRIP_NOPS (arg0); 8466 8467 if (TREE_CODE (arg0) == VECTOR_CST) 8468 { 8469 tree inner_type = TREE_TYPE (rtype); 8470 tree elts = TREE_VECTOR_CST_ELTS (arg0); 8471 tree n_elts = NULL_TREE; 8472 8473 for (; elts; elts = TREE_CHAIN (elts)) 8474 { 8475 unsigned int val = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_VALUE (elts)) << 4; 8476 n_elts = tree_cons (NULL_TREE, 8477 build_int_cst (inner_type, val), 8478 n_elts); 8479 } 8480 return build_vector (rtype, nreverse (n_elts)); 8481 } 8482 break; 8483 8484 case CODE_FOR_fmul8x16_vis: 8485 case CODE_FOR_fmul8x16au_vis: 8486 case CODE_FOR_fmul8x16al_vis: 8487 arg0 = TREE_VALUE (arglist); 8488 arg1 = TREE_VALUE (TREE_CHAIN (arglist)); 8489 STRIP_NOPS (arg0); 8490 STRIP_NOPS (arg1); 8491 8492 if (TREE_CODE (arg0) == VECTOR_CST && TREE_CODE (arg1) == VECTOR_CST) 8493 { 8494 tree inner_type = TREE_TYPE (rtype); 8495 tree elts0 = TREE_VECTOR_CST_ELTS (arg0); 8496 tree elts1 = TREE_VECTOR_CST_ELTS (arg1); 8497 tree n_elts = sparc_handle_vis_mul8x16 (icode, inner_type, elts0, 8498 elts1); 8499 8500 return build_vector (rtype, n_elts); 8501 } 8502 break; 8503 8504 case CODE_FOR_fpmerge_vis: 8505 arg0 = TREE_VALUE (arglist); 8506 arg1 = TREE_VALUE (TREE_CHAIN (arglist)); 8507 STRIP_NOPS (arg0); 8508 STRIP_NOPS (arg1); 8509 8510 if (TREE_CODE (arg0) == VECTOR_CST && TREE_CODE (arg1) == VECTOR_CST) 8511 { 8512 tree elts0 = TREE_VECTOR_CST_ELTS (arg0); 8513 tree elts1 = TREE_VECTOR_CST_ELTS (arg1); 8514 tree n_elts = NULL_TREE; 8515 8516 for (; elts0 && elts1; 8517 elts0 = TREE_CHAIN (elts0), elts1 = TREE_CHAIN (elts1)) 8518 { 8519 n_elts = tree_cons (NULL_TREE, TREE_VALUE (elts0), n_elts); 8520 n_elts = tree_cons (NULL_TREE, TREE_VALUE (elts1), n_elts); 8521 } 8522 8523 return build_vector (rtype, nreverse (n_elts)); 8524 } 8525 break; 8526 8527 case CODE_FOR_pdist_vis: 8528 arg0 = TREE_VALUE (arglist); 8529 arg1 = TREE_VALUE (TREE_CHAIN (arglist)); 8530 arg2 = TREE_VALUE (TREE_CHAIN (TREE_CHAIN (arglist))); 8531 STRIP_NOPS (arg0); 8532 STRIP_NOPS (arg1); 8533 STRIP_NOPS (arg2); 8534 8535 if (TREE_CODE (arg0) == VECTOR_CST 8536 && TREE_CODE (arg1) == VECTOR_CST 8537 && TREE_CODE (arg2) == INTEGER_CST) 8538 { 8539 int overflow = 0; 8540 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT low = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (arg2); 8541 HOST_WIDE_INT high = TREE_INT_CST_HIGH (arg2); 8542 tree elts0 = TREE_VECTOR_CST_ELTS (arg0); 8543 tree elts1 = TREE_VECTOR_CST_ELTS (arg1); 8544 8545 for (; elts0 && elts1; 8546 elts0 = TREE_CHAIN (elts0), elts1 = TREE_CHAIN (elts1)) 8547 { 8548 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT 8549 low0 = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_VALUE (elts0)), 8550 low1 = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_VALUE (elts1)); 8551 HOST_WIDE_INT high0 = TREE_INT_CST_HIGH (TREE_VALUE (elts0)); 8552 HOST_WIDE_INT high1 = TREE_INT_CST_HIGH (TREE_VALUE (elts1)); 8553 8554 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT l; 8555 HOST_WIDE_INT h; 8556 8557 overflow |= neg_double (low1, high1, &l, &h); 8558 overflow |= add_double (low0, high0, l, h, &l, &h); 8559 if (h < 0) 8560 overflow |= neg_double (l, h, &l, &h); 8561 8562 overflow |= add_double (low, high, l, h, &low, &high); 8563 } 8564 8565 gcc_assert (overflow == 0); 8566 8567 return build_int_cst_wide (rtype, low, high); 8568 } 8569 8570 default: 8571 break; 8572 } 8573 8574 return NULL_TREE; 8575} 8576 8577/* ??? This duplicates information provided to the compiler by the 8578 ??? scheduler description. Some day, teach genautomata to output 8579 ??? the latencies and then CSE will just use that. */ 8580 8581static bool 8582sparc_rtx_costs (rtx x, int code, int outer_code, int *total, 8583 bool speed ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED) 8584{ 8585 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x); 8586 bool float_mode_p = FLOAT_MODE_P (mode); 8587 8588 switch (code) 8589 { 8590 case CONST_INT: 8591 if (INTVAL (x) < 0x1000 && INTVAL (x) >= -0x1000) 8592 { 8593 *total = 0; 8594 return true; 8595 } 8596 /* FALLTHRU */ 8597 8598 case HIGH: 8599 *total = 2; 8600 return true; 8601 8602 case CONST: 8603 case LABEL_REF: 8604 case SYMBOL_REF: 8605 *total = 4; 8606 return true; 8607 8608 case CONST_DOUBLE: 8609 if (GET_MODE (x) == VOIDmode 8610 && ((CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (x) == 0 8611 && CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (x) < 0x1000) 8612 || (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (x) == -1 8613 && CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (x) < 0 8614 && CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (x) >= -0x1000))) 8615 *total = 0; 8616 else 8617 *total = 8; 8618 return true; 8619 8620 case MEM: 8621 /* If outer-code was a sign or zero extension, a cost 8622 of COSTS_N_INSNS (1) was already added in. This is 8623 why we are subtracting it back out. */ 8624 if (outer_code == ZERO_EXTEND) 8625 { 8626 *total = sparc_costs->int_zload - COSTS_N_INSNS (1); 8627 } 8628 else if (outer_code == SIGN_EXTEND) 8629 { 8630 *total = sparc_costs->int_sload - COSTS_N_INSNS (1); 8631 } 8632 else if (float_mode_p) 8633 { 8634 *total = sparc_costs->float_load; 8635 } 8636 else 8637 { 8638 *total = sparc_costs->int_load; 8639 } 8640 8641 return true; 8642 8643 case PLUS: 8644 case MINUS: 8645 if (float_mode_p) 8646 *total = sparc_costs->float_plusminus; 8647 else 8648 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1); 8649 return false; 8650 8651 case MULT: 8652 if (float_mode_p) 8653 *total = sparc_costs->float_mul; 8654 else if (! TARGET_HARD_MUL) 8655 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (25); 8656 else 8657 { 8658 int bit_cost; 8659 8660 bit_cost = 0; 8661 if (sparc_costs->int_mul_bit_factor) 8662 { 8663 int nbits; 8664 8665 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == CONST_INT) 8666 { 8667 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT value = INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)); 8668 for (nbits = 0; value != 0; value &= value - 1) 8669 nbits++; 8670 } 8671 else if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == CONST_DOUBLE 8672 && GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == VOIDmode) 8673 { 8674 rtx x1 = XEXP (x, 1); 8675 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT value1 = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (x1); 8676 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT value2 = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (x1); 8677 8678 for (nbits = 0; value1 != 0; value1 &= value1 - 1) 8679 nbits++; 8680 for (; value2 != 0; value2 &= value2 - 1) 8681 nbits++; 8682 } 8683 else 8684 nbits = 7; 8685 8686 if (nbits < 3) 8687 nbits = 3; 8688 bit_cost = (nbits - 3) / sparc_costs->int_mul_bit_factor; 8689 bit_cost = COSTS_N_INSNS (bit_cost); 8690 } 8691 8692 if (mode == DImode) 8693 *total = sparc_costs->int_mulX + bit_cost; 8694 else 8695 *total = sparc_costs->int_mul + bit_cost; 8696 } 8697 return false; 8698 8699 case ASHIFT: 8700 case ASHIFTRT: 8701 case LSHIFTRT: 8702 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1) + sparc_costs->shift_penalty; 8703 return false; 8704 8705 case DIV: 8706 case UDIV: 8707 case MOD: 8708 case UMOD: 8709 if (float_mode_p) 8710 { 8711 if (mode == DFmode) 8712 *total = sparc_costs->float_div_df; 8713 else 8714 *total = sparc_costs->float_div_sf; 8715 } 8716 else 8717 { 8718 if (mode == DImode) 8719 *total = sparc_costs->int_divX; 8720 else 8721 *total = sparc_costs->int_div; 8722 } 8723 return false; 8724 8725 case NEG: 8726 if (! float_mode_p) 8727 { 8728 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1); 8729 return false; 8730 } 8731 /* FALLTHRU */ 8732 8733 case ABS: 8734 case FLOAT: 8735 case UNSIGNED_FLOAT: 8736 case FIX: 8737 case UNSIGNED_FIX: 8738 case FLOAT_EXTEND: 8739 case FLOAT_TRUNCATE: 8740 *total = sparc_costs->float_move; 8741 return false; 8742 8743 case SQRT: 8744 if (mode == DFmode) 8745 *total = sparc_costs->float_sqrt_df; 8746 else 8747 *total = sparc_costs->float_sqrt_sf; 8748 return false; 8749 8750 case COMPARE: 8751 if (float_mode_p) 8752 *total = sparc_costs->float_cmp; 8753 else 8754 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1); 8755 return false; 8756 8757 case IF_THEN_ELSE: 8758 if (float_mode_p) 8759 *total = sparc_costs->float_cmove; 8760 else 8761 *total = sparc_costs->int_cmove; 8762 return false; 8763 8764 case IOR: 8765 /* Handle the NAND vector patterns. */ 8766 if (sparc_vector_mode_supported_p (GET_MODE (x)) 8767 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == NOT 8768 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == NOT) 8769 { 8770 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1); 8771 return true; 8772 } 8773 else 8774 return false; 8775 8776 default: 8777 return false; 8778 } 8779} 8780 8781/* Emit the sequence of insns SEQ while preserving the registers REG and REG2. 8782 This is achieved by means of a manual dynamic stack space allocation in 8783 the current frame. We make the assumption that SEQ doesn't contain any 8784 function calls, with the possible exception of calls to the GOT helper. */ 8785 8786static void 8787emit_and_preserve (rtx seq, rtx reg, rtx reg2) 8788{ 8789 /* We must preserve the lowest 16 words for the register save area. */ 8790 HOST_WIDE_INT offset = 16*UNITS_PER_WORD; 8791 /* We really need only 2 words of fresh stack space. */ 8792 HOST_WIDE_INT size = SPARC_STACK_ALIGN (offset + 2*UNITS_PER_WORD); 8793 8794 rtx slot 8795 = gen_rtx_MEM (word_mode, plus_constant (stack_pointer_rtx, 8796 SPARC_STACK_BIAS + offset)); 8797 8798 emit_insn (gen_stack_pointer_dec (GEN_INT (size))); 8799 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, slot, reg)); 8800 if (reg2) 8801 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, 8802 adjust_address (slot, word_mode, UNITS_PER_WORD), 8803 reg2)); 8804 emit_insn (seq); 8805 if (reg2) 8806 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, 8807 reg2, 8808 adjust_address (slot, word_mode, UNITS_PER_WORD))); 8809 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, reg, slot)); 8810 emit_insn (gen_stack_pointer_inc (GEN_INT (size))); 8811} 8812 8813/* Output the assembler code for a thunk function. THUNK_DECL is the 8814 declaration for the thunk function itself, FUNCTION is the decl for 8815 the target function. DELTA is an immediate constant offset to be 8816 added to THIS. If VCALL_OFFSET is nonzero, the word at address 8817 (*THIS + VCALL_OFFSET) should be additionally added to THIS. */ 8818 8819static void 8820sparc_output_mi_thunk (FILE *file, tree thunk_fndecl ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, 8821 HOST_WIDE_INT delta, HOST_WIDE_INT vcall_offset, 8822 tree function) 8823{ 8824 rtx this_rtx, insn, funexp; 8825 unsigned int int_arg_first; 8826 8827 reload_completed = 1; 8828 epilogue_completed = 1; 8829 8830 emit_note (NOTE_INSN_PROLOGUE_END); 8831 8832 if (flag_delayed_branch) 8833 { 8834 /* We will emit a regular sibcall below, so we need to instruct 8835 output_sibcall that we are in a leaf function. */ 8836 sparc_leaf_function_p = current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs = 1; 8837 8838 /* This will cause final.c to invoke leaf_renumber_regs so we 8839 must behave as if we were in a not-yet-leafified function. */ 8840 int_arg_first = SPARC_INCOMING_INT_ARG_FIRST; 8841 } 8842 else 8843 { 8844 /* We will emit the sibcall manually below, so we will need to 8845 manually spill non-leaf registers. */ 8846 sparc_leaf_function_p = current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs = 0; 8847 8848 /* We really are in a leaf function. */ 8849 int_arg_first = SPARC_OUTGOING_INT_ARG_FIRST; 8850 } 8851 8852 /* Find the "this" pointer. Normally in %o0, but in ARCH64 if the function 8853 returns a structure, the structure return pointer is there instead. */ 8854 if (TARGET_ARCH64 8855 && aggregate_value_p (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (function)), function)) 8856 this_rtx = gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, int_arg_first + 1); 8857 else 8858 this_rtx = gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, int_arg_first); 8859 8860 /* Add DELTA. When possible use a plain add, otherwise load it into 8861 a register first. */ 8862 if (delta) 8863 { 8864 rtx delta_rtx = GEN_INT (delta); 8865 8866 if (! SPARC_SIMM13_P (delta)) 8867 { 8868 rtx scratch = gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 1); 8869 emit_move_insn (scratch, delta_rtx); 8870 delta_rtx = scratch; 8871 } 8872 8873 /* THIS_RTX += DELTA. */ 8874 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (this_rtx, delta_rtx)); 8875 } 8876 8877 /* Add the word at address (*THIS_RTX + VCALL_OFFSET). */ 8878 if (vcall_offset) 8879 { 8880 rtx vcall_offset_rtx = GEN_INT (vcall_offset); 8881 rtx scratch = gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 1); 8882 8883 gcc_assert (vcall_offset < 0); 8884 8885 /* SCRATCH = *THIS_RTX. */ 8886 emit_move_insn (scratch, gen_rtx_MEM (Pmode, this_rtx)); 8887 8888 /* Prepare for adding VCALL_OFFSET. The difficulty is that we 8889 may not have any available scratch register at this point. */ 8890 if (SPARC_SIMM13_P (vcall_offset)) 8891 ; 8892 /* This is the case if ARCH64 (unless -ffixed-g5 is passed). */ 8893 else if (! fixed_regs[5] 8894 /* The below sequence is made up of at least 2 insns, 8895 while the default method may need only one. */ 8896 && vcall_offset < -8192) 8897 { 8898 rtx scratch2 = gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 5); 8899 emit_move_insn (scratch2, vcall_offset_rtx); 8900 vcall_offset_rtx = scratch2; 8901 } 8902 else 8903 { 8904 rtx increment = GEN_INT (-4096); 8905 8906 /* VCALL_OFFSET is a negative number whose typical range can be 8907 estimated as -32768..0 in 32-bit mode. In almost all cases 8908 it is therefore cheaper to emit multiple add insns than 8909 spilling and loading the constant into a register (at least 8910 6 insns). */ 8911 while (! SPARC_SIMM13_P (vcall_offset)) 8912 { 8913 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (scratch, increment)); 8914 vcall_offset += 4096; 8915 } 8916 vcall_offset_rtx = GEN_INT (vcall_offset); /* cannot be 0 */ 8917 } 8918 8919 /* SCRATCH = *(*THIS_RTX + VCALL_OFFSET). */ 8920 emit_move_insn (scratch, gen_rtx_MEM (Pmode, 8921 gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, 8922 scratch, 8923 vcall_offset_rtx))); 8924 8925 /* THIS_RTX += *(*THIS_RTX + VCALL_OFFSET). */ 8926 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (this_rtx, scratch)); 8927 } 8928 8929 /* Generate a tail call to the target function. */ 8930 if (! TREE_USED (function)) 8931 { 8932 assemble_external (function); 8933 TREE_USED (function) = 1; 8934 } 8935 funexp = XEXP (DECL_RTL (function), 0); 8936 8937 if (flag_delayed_branch) 8938 { 8939 funexp = gen_rtx_MEM (FUNCTION_MODE, funexp); 8940 insn = emit_call_insn (gen_sibcall (funexp)); 8941 SIBLING_CALL_P (insn) = 1; 8942 } 8943 else 8944 { 8945 /* The hoops we have to jump through in order to generate a sibcall 8946 without using delay slots... */ 8947 rtx spill_reg, seq, scratch = gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 1); 8948 8949 if (flag_pic) 8950 { 8951 spill_reg = gen_rtx_REG (word_mode, 15); /* %o7 */ 8952 start_sequence (); 8953 /* Delay emitting the GOT helper function because it needs to 8954 change the section and we are emitting assembly code. */ 8955 load_got_register (); /* clobbers %o7 */ 8956 scratch = legitimize_pic_address (funexp, scratch); 8957 seq = get_insns (); 8958 end_sequence (); 8959 emit_and_preserve (seq, spill_reg, pic_offset_table_rtx); 8960 } 8961 else if (TARGET_ARCH32) 8962 { 8963 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, 8964 scratch, 8965 gen_rtx_HIGH (SImode, funexp))); 8966 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, 8967 scratch, 8968 gen_rtx_LO_SUM (SImode, scratch, funexp))); 8969 } 8970 else /* TARGET_ARCH64 */ 8971 { 8972 switch (sparc_cmodel) 8973 { 8974 case CM_MEDLOW: 8975 case CM_MEDMID: 8976 /* The destination can serve as a temporary. */ 8977 sparc_emit_set_symbolic_const64 (scratch, funexp, scratch); 8978 break; 8979 8980 case CM_MEDANY: 8981 case CM_EMBMEDANY: 8982 /* The destination cannot serve as a temporary. */ 8983 spill_reg = gen_rtx_REG (DImode, 15); /* %o7 */ 8984 start_sequence (); 8985 sparc_emit_set_symbolic_const64 (scratch, funexp, spill_reg); 8986 seq = get_insns (); 8987 end_sequence (); 8988 emit_and_preserve (seq, spill_reg, 0); 8989 break; 8990 8991 default: 8992 gcc_unreachable (); 8993 } 8994 } 8995 8996 emit_jump_insn (gen_indirect_jump (scratch)); 8997 } 8998 8999 emit_barrier (); 9000 9001 /* Run just enough of rest_of_compilation to get the insns emitted. 9002 There's not really enough bulk here to make other passes such as 9003 instruction scheduling worth while. Note that use_thunk calls 9004 assemble_start_function and assemble_end_function. */ 9005 insn = get_insns (); 9006 insn_locators_alloc (); 9007 shorten_branches (insn); 9008 final_start_function (insn, file, 1); 9009 final (insn, file, 1); 9010 final_end_function (); 9011 9012 reload_completed = 0; 9013 epilogue_completed = 0; 9014} 9015 9016/* Return true if sparc_output_mi_thunk would be able to output the 9017 assembler code for the thunk function specified by the arguments 9018 it is passed, and false otherwise. */ 9019static bool 9020sparc_can_output_mi_thunk (const_tree thunk_fndecl ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, 9021 HOST_WIDE_INT delta ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, 9022 HOST_WIDE_INT vcall_offset, 9023 const_tree function ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED) 9024{ 9025 /* Bound the loop used in the default method above. */ 9026 return (vcall_offset >= -32768 || ! fixed_regs[5]); 9027} 9028 9029/* How to allocate a 'struct machine_function'. */ 9030 9031static struct machine_function * 9032sparc_init_machine_status (void) 9033{ 9034 return GGC_CNEW (struct machine_function); 9035} 9036 9037/* Locate some local-dynamic symbol still in use by this function 9038 so that we can print its name in local-dynamic base patterns. */ 9039 9040static const char * 9041get_some_local_dynamic_name (void) 9042{ 9043 rtx insn; 9044 9045 if (cfun->machine->some_ld_name) 9046 return cfun->machine->some_ld_name; 9047 9048 for (insn = get_insns (); insn ; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn)) 9049 if (INSN_P (insn) 9050 && for_each_rtx (&PATTERN (insn), get_some_local_dynamic_name_1, 0)) 9051 return cfun->machine->some_ld_name; 9052 9053 gcc_unreachable (); 9054} 9055 9056static int 9057get_some_local_dynamic_name_1 (rtx *px, void *data ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED) 9058{ 9059 rtx x = *px; 9060 9061 if (x 9062 && GET_CODE (x) == SYMBOL_REF 9063 && SYMBOL_REF_TLS_MODEL (x) == TLS_MODEL_LOCAL_DYNAMIC) 9064 { 9065 cfun->machine->some_ld_name = XSTR (x, 0); 9066 return 1; 9067 } 9068 9069 return 0; 9070} 9071 9072/* Handle the TARGET_DWARF_HANDLE_FRAME_UNSPEC hook. 9073 This is called from dwarf2out.c to emit call frame instructions 9074 for frame-related insns containing UNSPECs and UNSPEC_VOLATILEs. */ 9075static void 9076sparc_dwarf_handle_frame_unspec (const char *label, 9077 rtx pattern ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, 9078 int index ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED) 9079{ 9080 gcc_assert (index == UNSPECV_SAVEW); 9081 dwarf2out_window_save (label); 9082} 9083 9084/* This is called from dwarf2out.c via TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DTPREL. 9085 We need to emit DTP-relative relocations. */ 9086 9087static void 9088sparc_output_dwarf_dtprel (FILE *file, int size, rtx x) 9089{ 9090 switch (size) 9091 { 9092 case 4: 9093 fputs ("\t.word\t%r_tls_dtpoff32(", file); 9094 break; 9095 case 8: 9096 fputs ("\t.xword\t%r_tls_dtpoff64(", file); 9097 break; 9098 default: 9099 gcc_unreachable (); 9100 } 9101 output_addr_const (file, x); 9102 fputs (")", file); 9103} 9104 9105/* Do whatever processing is required at the end of a file. */ 9106 9107static void 9108sparc_file_end (void) 9109{ 9110 /* If we need to emit the special GOT helper function, do so now. */ 9111 if (got_helper_rtx) 9112 { 9113 const char *name = XSTR (got_helper_rtx, 0); 9114 const char *reg_name = reg_names[GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM]; 9115#ifdef DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO 9116 bool do_cfi; 9117#endif 9118 9119 if (USE_HIDDEN_LINKONCE) 9120 { 9121 tree decl = build_decl (BUILTINS_LOCATION, FUNCTION_DECL, 9122 get_identifier (name), 9123 build_function_type (void_type_node, 9124 void_list_node)); 9125 DECL_RESULT (decl) = build_decl (BUILTINS_LOCATION, RESULT_DECL, 9126 NULL_TREE, void_type_node); 9127 TREE_PUBLIC (decl) = 1; 9128 TREE_STATIC (decl) = 1; 9129 make_decl_one_only (decl, DECL_ASSEMBLER_NAME (decl)); 9130 DECL_VISIBILITY (decl) = VISIBILITY_HIDDEN; 9131 DECL_VISIBILITY_SPECIFIED (decl) = 1; 9132 resolve_unique_section (decl, 0, flag_function_sections); 9133 allocate_struct_function (decl, true); 9134 cfun->is_thunk = 1; 9135 current_function_decl = decl; 9136 init_varasm_status (); 9137 assemble_start_function (decl, name); 9138 } 9139 else 9140 { 9141 const int align = floor_log2 (FUNCTION_BOUNDARY / BITS_PER_UNIT); 9142 switch_to_section (text_section); 9143 if (align > 0) 9144 ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN (asm_out_file, align); 9145 ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL (asm_out_file, name); 9146 } 9147 9148#ifdef DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO 9149 do_cfi = dwarf2out_do_cfi_asm (); 9150 if (do_cfi) 9151 fprintf (asm_out_file, "\t.cfi_startproc\n"); 9152#endif 9153 if (flag_delayed_branch) 9154 fprintf (asm_out_file, "\tjmp\t%%o7+8\n\t add\t%%o7, %s, %s\n", 9155 reg_name, reg_name); 9156 else 9157 fprintf (asm_out_file, "\tadd\t%%o7, %s, %s\n\tjmp\t%%o7+8\n\t nop\n", 9158 reg_name, reg_name); 9159#ifdef DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO 9160 if (do_cfi) 9161 fprintf (asm_out_file, "\t.cfi_endproc\n"); 9162#endif 9163 } 9164 9165 if (NEED_INDICATE_EXEC_STACK) 9166 file_end_indicate_exec_stack (); 9167} 9168 9169#ifdef TARGET_ALTERNATE_LONG_DOUBLE_MANGLING 9170/* Implement TARGET_MANGLE_TYPE. */ 9171 9172static const char * 9173sparc_mangle_type (const_tree type) 9174{ 9175 if (!TARGET_64BIT 9176 && TYPE_MAIN_VARIANT (type) == long_double_type_node 9177 && TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE_128) 9178 return "g"; 9179 9180 /* For all other types, use normal C++ mangling. */ 9181 return NULL; 9182} 9183#endif 9184 9185/* Expand code to perform a 8 or 16-bit compare and swap by doing 32-bit 9186 compare and swap on the word containing the byte or half-word. */ 9187 9188void 9189sparc_expand_compare_and_swap_12 (rtx result, rtx mem, rtx oldval, rtx newval) 9190{ 9191 rtx addr1 = force_reg (Pmode, XEXP (mem, 0)); 9192 rtx addr = gen_reg_rtx (Pmode); 9193 rtx off = gen_reg_rtx (SImode); 9194 rtx oldv = gen_reg_rtx (SImode); 9195 rtx newv = gen_reg_rtx (SImode); 9196 rtx oldvalue = gen_reg_rtx (SImode); 9197 rtx newvalue = gen_reg_rtx (SImode); 9198 rtx res = gen_reg_rtx (SImode); 9199 rtx resv = gen_reg_rtx (SImode); 9200 rtx memsi, val, mask, end_label, loop_label, cc; 9201 9202 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, addr, 9203 gen_rtx_AND (Pmode, addr1, GEN_INT (-4)))); 9204 9205 if (Pmode != SImode) 9206 addr1 = gen_lowpart (SImode, addr1); 9207 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, off, 9208 gen_rtx_AND (SImode, addr1, GEN_INT (3)))); 9209 9210 memsi = gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, addr); 9211 set_mem_alias_set (memsi, ALIAS_SET_MEMORY_BARRIER); 9212 MEM_VOLATILE_P (memsi) = MEM_VOLATILE_P (mem); 9213 9214 val = force_reg (SImode, memsi); 9215 9216 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, off, 9217 gen_rtx_XOR (SImode, off, 9218 GEN_INT (GET_MODE (mem) == QImode 9219 ? 3 : 2)))); 9220 9221 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, off, 9222 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (SImode, off, GEN_INT (3)))); 9223 9224 if (GET_MODE (mem) == QImode) 9225 mask = force_reg (SImode, GEN_INT (0xff)); 9226 else 9227 mask = force_reg (SImode, GEN_INT (0xffff)); 9228 9229 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, mask, 9230 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (SImode, mask, off))); 9231 9232 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, val, 9233 gen_rtx_AND (SImode, gen_rtx_NOT (SImode, mask), 9234 val))); 9235 9236 oldval = gen_lowpart (SImode, oldval); 9237 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, oldv, 9238 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (SImode, oldval, off))); 9239 9240 newval = gen_lowpart_common (SImode, newval); 9241 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, newv, 9242 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (SImode, newval, off))); 9243 9244 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, oldv, 9245 gen_rtx_AND (SImode, oldv, mask))); 9246 9247 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, newv, 9248 gen_rtx_AND (SImode, newv, mask))); 9249 9250 end_label = gen_label_rtx (); 9251 loop_label = gen_label_rtx (); 9252 emit_label (loop_label); 9253 9254 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, oldvalue, 9255 gen_rtx_IOR (SImode, oldv, val))); 9256 9257 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, newvalue, 9258 gen_rtx_IOR (SImode, newv, val))); 9259 9260 emit_insn (gen_sync_compare_and_swapsi (res, memsi, oldvalue, newvalue)); 9261 9262 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (res, oldvalue, EQ, NULL, SImode, 0, end_label); 9263 9264 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, resv, 9265 gen_rtx_AND (SImode, gen_rtx_NOT (SImode, mask), 9266 res))); 9267 9268 cc = gen_compare_reg_1 (NE, resv, val); 9269 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, val, resv)); 9270 9271 /* Use cbranchcc4 to separate the compare and branch! */ 9272 emit_jump_insn (gen_cbranchcc4 (gen_rtx_NE (VOIDmode, cc, const0_rtx), 9273 cc, const0_rtx, loop_label)); 9274 9275 emit_label (end_label); 9276 9277 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, res, 9278 gen_rtx_AND (SImode, res, mask))); 9279 9280 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, res, 9281 gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT (SImode, res, off))); 9282 9283 emit_move_insn (result, gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (result), res)); 9284} 9285 9286/* Implement TARGET_FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED. */ 9287 9288bool 9289sparc_frame_pointer_required (void) 9290{ 9291 return !(current_function_is_leaf && only_leaf_regs_used ()); 9292} 9293 9294/* The way this is structured, we can't eliminate SFP in favor of SP 9295 if the frame pointer is required: we want to use the SFP->HFP elimination 9296 in that case. But the test in update_eliminables doesn't know we are 9297 assuming below that we only do the former elimination. */ 9298 9299bool 9300sparc_can_eliminate (const int from ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, const int to) 9301{ 9302 return (to == HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM 9303 || !targetm.frame_pointer_required ()); 9304} 9305 9306#include "gt-sparc.h" 9307